giao an Anh 8

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.26 MB, 209 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Preparing date: 19/08/2012 Teaching date: 22 /08/ 2012
Period :1

Revision
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students revise the knowledge of English 7.
*Grammar : comparison, simple future tense, past simple tense.

B/ Teaching aids:

text book, extra-board

C/ Work arrangements: ask and answer, pairs, groups
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Slap the board

II/ New lesson

- Ask Ss to say form of comparatives
and superlatives.

- T listens, corrects and writes on the
board.

- Ss copy.

- T guides Ss to do exercise.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.
Key:

1. English is difficult than Chinese.
2. Russia is the largest country in
the world.

3. These shoes are the most
expensive of all.

4. Her car is cheaper than mine.
-Ask Ss to say form, meaning and
uses of the tense.

- T listens, corrects and writes on the
board.

I/ Comparatives
1/ short adjectives

…+ adj-er + than + …
Example: I am taller than you.
2/ long adjectives

…. more + adj + than + …

This book is more interesting than that one.
II/ Superlatives

1/ short adjectives

… the + adj-est + …

Ex: I am the tallest student in my class.
2/ long adjectives

… the most + long adjectives + ….
Ex: She is the most beautiful girl.

* Note: irregular adjectives

Adjectives Comparatives Superlatives
good better the best
bad worse the worst
little less the least
many/much more the most
far farther/ the farthest/
further the furthest

Exercise

Make sentences, using given words
Ex: This exercise / easy / that one.
- This exercise is easy than that one.
1. English/ difficult / Chinese.

2. Russia / large / country / in the world.
3. These shoes / expensive / of all.
4. Her car / cheap / mine.

III/ Future Simple tense
1/ Form

(+) S + will + infinitive

( -) S + will / won’t + infinitive
( ? ) Will + S + infinitive + … ?

different birthday shelf

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Ss say adverbs that are used in the
tense.

- Ask Ss to say form, meaning and
use of the tense.

- T listen, corrects and writes on the
board.

- Ss say the adverbs which are used
in the tense.

- T guides Ss to do exercise.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
1. bought
2. will return

3. didn’t watch
4. will play

2/ Use

… to express an action which happens in the
future.

3/ Adverbs

tomorrow, next (week) , in (2009 ),

Ex: I will go to Hanoi with my mother next
month.

IV/ Past Simple tense
1/ Form

( + ) S + V-ed/P + …

( - ) S + didn’t + infinitive + …
( ? ) Didn’t + S + infinitive + …
2/ Use

… to express an action which happened and
finished at a definite time in the past.

3/ Adverbs

yesterday, last (week) , …ago, from … to,
in (2005), when + a clause of time in the
past.

Ex: I visited my grandmother last week.
Write correct form of the verbs in brackets.
1. I (buy) a book yesterday.

2. They (return) Hanoi tomorrow.
3. Last night I (not, watch) TV.

4. We (play) chess next week.
E/ Guiding- Homework

- Make 5 sentences, using the structures.

- Prepare Unit 1: Getting started + Listen and read
Read the dialogue and find new words.

Preparing date: 19/08/2012 Teaching date: 22 /08/ 2012
Period :2

unit 1 : my friends

Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about Hoa, Lan, Nien
and to review simple present and simple past tenses.

*Grammar: What do/does + S + look like ?
enough + to-infinitive

* Voc: seem, next-door neighbor, look like
B/ Teaching aids:

text book, cassette, tape, picture
C/ Work arrangements: pairs, groups, T-WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- T introduces: I often play chess in my
free time.

What do you do in your free time?

I/ Getting started

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

- Ss look at pictures, T gives questions to
guides.

- Ss look at the questions and one
student describes the picture a).
- Ss work in pairs to describe the
pictures.

II/ Listen and read

- T introduces the dialogue.

+ Where is Hoa from?
+ Whom does she live with?

+ Hoa is talking to Lan about Nien and
describing her.

- Ss listen to tape the first time and
answer T’s questions.

- T checks and corrects.
- T elicits some new words.
translation

explanation
example

Checking : What and Where

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue to find new
structures.

- T guides Ss to find their form ,
meaning and uses.

- Ss listen to the tape again.
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- Ask some Ss to read it aloud.
- T listens and corrects.

- T introduces the questions and guides.

- Ss read the questions and dialogue to
answer each question. Ss work

individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to make dialogue about their
friends, class or families.

- T does model with a good student.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

Ex: Picture a)
T asks:

Who are they?

What are they doing?
Where are they?

Is it morning or afternoon?
II/ Listen and read

* Pre- questions:
- Who’s Nien ?

- Is she a beautiful girl?

* New words

seem (v) : dêng nh, cã vỴ nh

a next-door neighbor (n) : mét ngêi
l¸ng giỊng
(to) look like : tr«ng nh

* New grammar
Model sentences:

- What does she look like?
She’s beautiful.

“What … look like?” is used to ask
about appearance.

- She wasn’t old enough to be in my
class.

… adj + enough + to infinitive + …
means: đủ … để làm gì đó…

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

2. Answer the following questions.
a/ She lives in Hue.

b/ No, she doesn’t.

c/ It is “ She wasn’t old enough to be in
my class.

d/ She is going to visit Hoa at Christmas.
3/ Making dialogues.

E/ Guiding- Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Example: (1) be – is

+ Exercise 2: Use Present Simple tense.
( + ) S + V + ….

( - ) S + don’t / doesn’t + infinitive +

Preparing date: 22/08/2011 Teaching date: 25 /08/ 2011
Period : 3

unit 1 : my friends
Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to:
+ Introduce and describe people's appearance

+ Listen to dialogue for detailed information
* Grammar: Present simple

* Vocabulary: slim, straight, curly,bold,blond,fair
B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Matching

A B
1. tall a. gÇy
2. short b. dµi
3. black c. bÐo
4. thin d. cao
5. long e. thÊp
6. brown f. ®en
7. fat g. n©u
Key: 1-d, 2- e, 3- f, 4- a, 5- b, 6- g, 7 – c.

II/ New lesson
1. Presentation

- T elicits some new words.
picture

visual
visual

picture
picture
picture

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the dialogue.

- T reads.- Ss listen.
- Ss read in pairs. (1’)
- One pair reads it aloud.

- T guides Ss to find new structures.
- T correct. – Ss copy.

2. Practice

- Ss make sentences, using the given
words.

- T checks and corrects.

I/ Speak
* New words

slim (adj): thanh, mảnh dẻ
straight (adj) : th¼ng

curly (adj ): quăn, xoăn (tóc)
bold (adj ) : hãi

blond (adj ) : vµng hoe (tãc )
fair (adj) : vàng nhạt ( tóc)
tr¾ng (da)
1. Read the dialogue.

Ex: Mary

a. She has long blond hair.
S + has/have + adj + hair
to describe hair
b. She is short and thin.

S + be + adj – to describe body
* Word cue drill

- he/ tall/ thin

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5>

+ He is tall and thin.
+ She has short black hair.
+ She has curly blond hair.
- Ss look at the pictures in book.
- Call on one student to describe one
person in the picture and others guess.
- Go on until 6 people described.
3. Production

- Ask Ss to describe one person in class
and other Ss guess.

- Who guess right person go to the board

and describe for other to guess.

1. Pre-listening

- T introduces the situation and
requirement.

- Ss read the expressions in the box and
say the meanings and uses of each one.
- Ss read the dialogues and predict to
complete them.

- T checks and corrects.
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape to check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T calls on some pairs to say their
answers.

- T corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ss work in pairs to play the roles.
- T checks and corrects.

- she/ curly/ blond/ hair

2/ Make similar dialogues
Example:

S1: This person is tall and thin. He has
short black hair.

S2 : Is this Van?
S1: Yes.

3/ Guessing game

II/ Listen

Listen and complete the conversations
Use the expressions in the box.

1. Prediction

2. Listening

(1) I’d like to meet you.
(2) Nice to meet you.
(3) I’d like to meet you.

(4) It’s a pleasure to meet you.
(5) come and meet

(6) How do you do?
3. Role-play

E/ Guiding- Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 3 on page 7 in workbook.

Describe each person, using given words in the box.
Note: pretty (adj) : xinh đẹp

handsome (adj) : đẹp trai
suit ( n): bộ complê

ugly (adj) : xÊu xÝ

Preparing date: 26/08/2011 Teaching date: 29 /08/ 2011

Period : 4

unit 1 : my friends

Lesson 3 : Read 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read a passage to know more about
Ba’s friends.

*Voc: character, sociable, generous, orphanage, reserved ,outgoing , joke , annoy
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

</div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Brainstorming

humorous

II/ New lesson
1/ Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
example
translation

situation
situation
explanation

translation
translation
situation
Checking : What and Where

- T introduces the situation of the text
and requirement of the first exercise.
- Ss read the exercise and guess to
complete each sentence.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks two Ss’ prediction.
2/ While-reading

- Ask Ss to read the text and check
their prediction. (5’)

- Ss compare with a partner.

- Call on 2 Ss to write their answers on
the board.

- T corrects.

- Ss write their sentences in notebook.
- T introduces the questions.

- Ss run through the questions.

- Ss read the text again and answer the
question individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
3/ Post-reading

- Base on the content of the text, T
asks Ss to write a short paragraph
about their friends.

- T checks and corrects.

* Vocabulary

character (n) : tÝnh nÕt, tÝnh c¸ch
sociable (adj) : dễ gần gũi, chan hoà
generous (adj) : réng lỵng, réng r·i
orphanage (n) : trại mồ côi

reserved (adj) : kín đáo, dè dặt
outgoing (adj) : thân thiện

joke (n) : lời nói đùa, chuyện đùa
annoy (v) : làm khó chịu, làm bực mình
1. Choose the best answer and write
* Prediction Reading
a/ A
b/ C
c/ B
d/ D
2. Now answer the questions.
a/ He feels lucky.

b/ Bao is the most sociable.
c/ Khai likes reading.

d/ His jokes sometimes annoy his friends.
e/ Bao spends his free time doing volunteer
work at a local orphanage.

f/ We have the same/ different characters.

3. Describe your close friends

Example:

I have a lot of friends.

But Hoa is my close friend. She …

E/ Guiding - Homework

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 7 on page 11,12 in workbook.

+ Write a paragraph about your friend , basing on the questions.
- Prepare : Write

+ Read the exercises and find new words with their meanings.

Preparing date: 28/08/2011 Teaching date: 31 /08/ 2011

Period :5

unit 1 : my friends

Lesson 4 : Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a passage about their close
friends.

B/ Teaching aids:

Text book,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Checking old lesson

Correcting exercise 7 on page 11, 12 in workbook
- Call on 2 or 3 Ss to read their writing.

- T listens and corrects.
III/ New lesson

1/ Pre- writing

- T asks Ss to read the information about
Tam and the passage.

- T asks some questions.
- Ss answer.

- T introduces the situation.

- Ss work in pairs to fill a form for their
partner.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks some Ss about their forms.

1. Read the information about Tam.

Answer the questions:

a. How old is Tam?

b. What does he look like?
c. What is he like?

d. Who are his friends?
2. Fill in a similar form.
Name :

Age :

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

2/ While-writing

- Ask Ss to write a paragraph about their
partner, using the form above and basing
on the model one.

- Ss work individual. (10’)

- T goes around to help Ss and writes
down their typical mistakes.

3/ Post-writing

- T corrects the Ss’ typical mistakes on
the board.

- Ss share their writing.

- Some Ss read their writing aloud.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Write a paragraph about your 
partner.

Example:

His/ Her name is … and he/she is …
years old. He/She lives … with …
He/She is ... and has… hair. He/She …
His/Her best friends are ….

4. Correction

E/ Guiding homework

- Write a paragraph about yourself or one of your family members.
Example:

I am/ My name is …
or : My (sister) is ….
- Prepare : Language focus

Read the exercises and do them before.
Revise present simple and past simple.

Preparing date: 29/08/2011 Teaching date: 01 /09/ 2011

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

Lesson 5 : Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use and compare Past Simple tense
and Present Simple tense and use the structure “ (not) adj + enough + to-infinitive “ to
practice.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Pelmanism

live send be come show write

lived sent was/were came showed wrote

II/ New lesson

- T introduces the requirements of the
exercise.

- Ask Ss to say the forms and uses of the
tenses.

- T explains the examples.

- Ss complete the paragraphs individual.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces some new words.

- T introduces the exercise and guides.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss say other use of the Present Simple
tense.

- T introduces the picture and questions.
- Ask Ss to look at the picture and
answer the questions.

- Ss work in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Complete the paragraphs
* Present Simple tense

- Form : S + V/V-s/-es

- Use: to express habitual action.

* Past Simple tense

- Form : S + V-ed/ P

- Use: To express an action

completed at a definite time in the
past.

a/ 1. lives 2. sent
3. was 4. is
b/ 1. are 2. came
3. showed 4. introduced
2. Complete the dialogue.

* Vocabulary

planet (n) : hµnh tinh
Mars (n) : sao Ho¶
Mercury (n) : sao Thủ
* Exercise

1.sets 5. is
2. moves / goes 6. is
3. moves / goes

4. is
* Note :

The Present Simple tense is also used to

express an action which is always true.
3. Look and describe.

Example:

S1: How many people are there in the
picture?

S2: There are four.

S1: What does the boy look like?
S2: He is thin and tall. He has short
black hair.

S1: What is he wearing?

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

- T sets the scene: Ask a student to hang
a picture on the wall but he/she is too
shot. He/She can’t hang it on the wall.
- Ask Ss to say a sentence to describe
that situation.

- T writes that sentence on the board and
guides.

- Ss read the example in book.
- Ss complete other sentences.
- T checks and corrects.

shorts.

S1: What about the woman?

………

4. Complete the dialogue. Use (not) 
 adjective + enough .

* Model sentence:

He is not tall enough to hang the picture.
be adj V

-Form:

….(not) adj + enough + to infinitive + ...
- Meaning: (không ) đủ …. để làm gì ….
b/ not old enough

c/ not strong enough
d/ not good enough

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Do exercise 5 on page 9 in workbook.

Ss use structure of enough to write sentences.
Example:

a/ The weather wasn’t warm enough to swimming.

- Prepare: Unit 2: Read part” Getting started + Listen and read” before and find
new words with their meanings.

Preparing date: 04/09/2011 Teaching date: 07 /09/ 2011
Period : 7 unit 2: making arrangements

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the telephone to make and
confirm arrangements.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape, picture
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

-T introduces and explains requirements.
- Ss read the objects and words to match.
-Ss compare with their partners.

- T checks and corrects.
- Ss read the words in chorus.

I/ Getting started

Match each object with its name.
a/ an answering machine

b/ a mobile phone
c/ a fax machine

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

II/ Listen and read

-T shows picture and sets the scene: Hoa
and Nga are talking on the phone. They
are talking about going to see a movie.
- Ask Ss to look at book and listen to
tape (2 times)

- Ask Ss to match the phrase with their
meanings.

- Ss work individual.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
find sentence and say form, use,

meaning of “ be going to”.

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss gives examples.

- T guides.

- Ss read the dialogue again to ask and
answer in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- Ask some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

f/ an address book
II/ Listen and read
1. Matching

A B

a. Hold on. 1. Nó đợc chiếu ở
đâu?

b. Is 6.30 all right? 2. Khá xa ….
c. Where’s it on? 3. 6.30 đợc chứ?
d. A bit far from … 4. Chờ nhé.
Key:

a- 4, b- 3, c- 1, d- 2.
2. Grammar

* Model sentence

I am going to see the movie Dream City.
- Form:

…. be going to + infinitive …..
- Use: - to express plan in the future.
* Example:

- It’s going to rain.

- My brother is going to play football
with his friends.

3. Ask and answer

a. Nga d. Nga
b. Nga e. Hoa
c. Nga f. Nga
4. Practice the dialogue with a 
partner.

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Do exercise 1 on page 13 in workbook.

Write sentences, using “ be going to + infinitive “
Example: He is going to be a driver.

Note:

chef (n) : đầu bếp

interpreter (n) : ngời phiên dịch
pilot (n) : phi c«ng

athlete (n) : vận động viên thể dục
lawyer (n) : luật s

- Prepare: Speak + Listen

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

Preparing date: 05/09/2011 Teaching date: 08 /09/ 2011

Period : 8

unit 2: making arrangements
 Lesson 2: Speak + Listen

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk on the phone about intentions
with “going to”, use it to practice and complete a telephone message by listening.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Telephone transmitting
- Divide the class into 2 teams.

- Choose 6 Ss in each class.

- T gives 2 first Ss in 2 teams telephone number:
team 1: 0912431787

team 2: 0915068969
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-speaking

- T sets the scene and explains the
requirements.

- Ss read the sentences to find who are
talking on the phone.

- Ss work in pairs to order the dialogue.
(3’)

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask one pair to read the dialogue
completed aloud.

2. While-speaking
- T introduces situation.

- Ss work in pairs to complete the
dialogue. (4’)

- T checks and corrects.

- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects their
pronunciation and stress.
3. Post-speaking

- Ask Ss to make similar dialogues.
- T guides.

- Ss work in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

I/ Speak

1. Ordering to make a dialogue
Eric Adam
b - f
j - a
i - c
e - k
g - h
d

2. Complete the dialogue.

Bao: May I speak to Ba? This is Bao.
Bao: I’m fine, thanks. And you?
Bao: Can you play chess tonight?
Bao: What about tomorrow afternoon?
Bao: I’ll meet you at the Central Chess
Club?

Bao: Is 2 o’clock OK?

3. Making similar arrangements.
-invite your friend to play football
- invite your friend to go swimming
II/ Listen

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

1. Pre-listening

- Ask Ss to look at the form of the
massage.

- T sets the scene.

- Ss guess information to complete the
massage.

- Ss share with a partner.
- T checks some Ss.
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to the tape and fill in the

massage.

- Ss share with a partner.
- T checks some Ss.

- Ss listen again and correct.
- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to look at the massage and say
the content of the dialogue.

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T checks and corrects.

* Listening

Date: Time:
For: The principal

Massage: Mrs. Mary Nguyen wanted to
 see you at 9.45 on Tuesday
 morning.

Telephone number: 64683720942

* Retell the massage

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the dialogue in notebook.

- Do exercise 4 on page 17 in workbook.
+ T sets the scene ( in book ) and guides.
+ Ss read the sentences.

+ T explains difficult words if necessary.
- Prepare part: Read

Read the lesson before and find new words with their meanings.

Preparing date: 09/09/2011 Teaching date: 12 /09/ 2011

Week 3

Period : 9

unit 2: making arrangements
Lesson 3: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about Alexander
Graham Bell.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

to communicate

- Divide the class into 2 teams.

- One by one writes on the board.
- T checks and gives marks.
* Key:

+ to have a massage
+ to call someone
+ to chat with friends
+ to make arrangements

+ to talk a person who lives far from

+ to get information at the airport or railway station quickly
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T introduces the text:

+ Do you know who invented telephone?
+ What do you know about him?

+ Look at the picture.

He is Alexander Graham Bell. He
invented telephone.

- T elicits some new words.
translation

explanation
example
translation
explanation
situation

* Checking: What and Where

- Ask Ss to look at the exercise, read the
sentences and guess.

- T explains difficult sentences if
necessary.

- Ss work individual and then compare
with a partner.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-reading

- Ask Ss to read the text and check the
prediction. (5’)

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
Lucky numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
d LK e a LK f c b

- Ss answer and correct false sentences.
- Ss read the events and then read the
text again.

- Ss order the events.

- Ss work individual and then compare
with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-reading

- Ask Ss to use their own words to retell

* Vocabulary

emigrate (v ) : xuÊt c¶nh, di c
deaf-mute (n) : tËt võa c©m võa ®iÕc
transmit (v) : trun, ph¸t tÝn hiƯu
conduct (v) : thùc hiƯn, tiÕn hµnh
device (n) : thiÕt bÞ, dơng cơ
demonstrate (v): biĨu diƠn

1. True or False

*Prediction * Reading
a. F
b. F
c. T
d. F

e. F
f. T
* Correction

a. the USA Edinburgh, Scotland
b. in a hospital in Boston

at Boston University
d. 1877 1876

e. drop “ between deaf-mute”

2. Put the events in the correct order.
d- e- a- g- c- b- f

* Note:

neither hear nor speak: không nghe thấy
cũng chẳng nói đợc
3. Retell

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

Alexander’s life.

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T checks and corrects.

Example: Alexander Graham Bell was
born in Edinburgh in 1847. He lived in
the USA.

D/ Guiding- Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Continue to write about Alexander’s life.
- Do exercise 3 on page 16 in workbook.

Use “be going to” to write about Ba’s activities plan in the summer.
Example:

He’s going to play soccer.
- Prepare part: Write

Read the exercises and do them before.

Preparing date: 11/ 09 /2011 Teaching date: 14 /09/ 2011

Period :10

unit 2: making arrangements

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a telephone message.
B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangement: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Matching

A B
1. message a. buæi tra

2. customer b. phục vụ
3. midday c. lời nhắn
4. furniture d. số điện thoại
5. service e. khách hàng
6. telephone number f. đồ đạc
Key: 1- c, 2- e, 3- a, 4- f, 5- b, 6- d.

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T elicits new words.
translation

example
situation
example
explanation

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- Ask Ss to read the message and
passage.

*Vocabulary

delivery (n) : chuyển giao, phân phối

stationery (n) : đồ dùng văn phòng
order (n) : đơn đặt hàng

(to) pick someone up : đón ai đó
racket (n) : vợt

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- Ask Ss to use information in the
message to fill in the passage.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
2. While-writing

- Ask Ss read and copy the form of
message on page 24 in notebook.

- Ask Ss to read the passage on page 23
to complete the message.

- Ss run through the passage.
- Ss work individual (7’).
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- Call on 2 Ss to write their message on

the board.

3. Post-writing

- T checks and corrects.

(1) telephoned
(2) May 12
(3) speak
(4) took
(5) name
(6) delivery
(7) Mr Ha
(8) at

2. Read the passage and write the 
telephone message.

Thanh Cong Delivery Service
Date : June 16

Time : After midday
For : Mrs. Van

Message: Mr. Nam called about his
 stationery order. He wanted 
 you to call him at 8 634 082
Taken by: Mr. Toan

E/Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the mew words.

Do exercise 3. Write a message, use information from a dialogue.
- Do exercise 7 on page 19 in workbook.

+ Write your plan in this summer, use “be going to” and given ideas.
- Prepare part “ Language focus”

Revise the use of “be going to” and prepositions of places.

Preparing date: 12/09/2011 Teaching date: 15 /09/ 2011

Period : 11
unit 2: making arrangements
 Lesson 5: Language focus

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use “be going to” to say about
intentions and further practice adverbs of places.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Chatting

T asks: What are you going to do in this summer?
Ss say their intentions in this summer.

II/ New lesson

- T explains requirements and example.
+ What does it mean?

+ What is form of verb after “be going
to”?

+ When do we use “be going to”?
- T guides Ss to do exercise.
- Ss run through the sentences.

- Ss read and find out intention of each
person. Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks: What are you going to do
tomorrow/on the weekend?

- T explains the requirements.
- Ss read and make three questions.
- T does model.

- Ss copy the questionnaire and complete
the column “you” with checks () and

crosses ().

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T guides and model with a good
student.

- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.

- Ask Ss to say about their attention and
their partner.

- T listens and corrects.

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in book.
T introduces situation.

- Ss read the given adverbs and say their

1. Say what the people are going to do
Example:

Nga has a movie ticket.
She’s going to see a movie.
- Form: be going to + infinitive
- Use: express an intention

a. They are going to go fishing.

b. She’s going to read that novel.
c. She’s going to do her homework

in Math.

d. He’s going to watch an action
movie on TV tonight.

e. She’s going to give him a birthday
presents.

2a. Complete the list
Example:

go picnic
listen to music
go swimming

2b. Work in pairs to complete the
your partner column.

Example 1:

T: Are you going to see a movie?
S: Yes, I am. ()

T: Are you going to play sports on the
weekend?

S: No, I am not. ()

Example 2:

- On the weekend, I’m going to see a
movie.

- My friend, Nam, is going to go fishing.
3. Complete the speech bubbles.

*Key:
b. here

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

meanings.

- Ss read and complete each sentences.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

d. outside
e. there
f. inside

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.

- Do exercise 6 on page 18,19 in workbook.
Use given adverbs to complete the sentences.

- Write your intention and your partner’s on the weekend, use “be going to”.

- Prepare: Unit 3: Getting started+ Listen and read

Read the lesson before and find new words with their meanings.

Preparing date: 16/09/2011 Teaching date: 19 /09/ 2011

Period :12

unit 3: At home

Lesson 1: Getting started and listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the dialogue and use
modal verb “have to” to talk about housework.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, tape, picture.
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC

D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Test 15’
Write answer to the questions.

1. What are you going to drink? ( a cup of coffee)
2. What is he going to study? ( Math)

3. What are they going to buy? ( some books)
4. Is she going to cook dinner? ( Yes)

5. Where are you going to go? ( fishing)
Answer – Marks
Each right sentence is 2 marks.

1. I’m going to drink a cup of coffee.
2. He’s going to study Math.

3. They are going to buy some book.
4. Yes, she is.

5. I’m going to go fishing.
II/ New lesson

- T asks some Ss: What do you often do
at home?

- Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures in book and

I/ Getting started

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

say the names of activities in the
pictures.

- Ss work individual and then compare
with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T shows the picture and introduces the
situation of the dialogue.

- Ss look at book and listen to tape.
- T elicits some new words.

picture
Ppicture
example
situation
picture

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- Read the dialogue again and answer:
What does Nam have to do first?

What does it mean?

What is form of verb after “has to”?
- Ask Ss to find sentences which have
the form.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement and
example.

- Ss read the dialogue again and
complete the list.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to answer the question
individual.

- T checks some Ss and corrects.

b. making the bed
c. sweeping the floor
d. cooking the meals
e. tidying up

f. feeding the chickens
II/ Listen and read

* Vocabulary

steamer (n) : nåi hÊp

cupboard (n) : tủ chạn, tủ ly
sink (n) : bồn rửa bát đĩa
saucepan (n) : cái chảo

rice cooker (n) : nồi cơm điện
* Grammar

He has to cook dinner.

- Form: have/has to + infinitive
- Meaning: phaØ, b¾t buéc

1. Practice the dialogue.

2. Complete the list.
- cook dinner

- go to the market to buy fish and
vegetable

- call his Aunt Chi to ask her to
meet his mother at Grandma’s
house.

* Answer:

What do you have to do at home?

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 1 on page 20 in workbook.
have to = must

Ex: I have to/must go home now.

- Prepare part: Speak

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Preparing date: 18/09/2011 Teaching date: 21 /09/ 2011

Period 13

unit 3: At home

Lesson 2: Speak

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use the positions of place to talk
about position of furniture in the house.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Matching

A B

1. cushion a. điện thoại
2. coffee-table b. bøc tranh
3. telephone c. gèi

4. couch d. bµn nhá, thÊp

5. stereo e. đi văng

6. picture f. đài, máy cat set
* Key: 1- c, 2- d, 3 – a, 4- e, 5- f, 6 – b.

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-speaking

- T uses the pictures in book to elicit
some new words.

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the picture and
requirement.

- Ss look at the picture and say the
names of objects.

2. While- speaking
- T does some examples.

- Ss say the position of the items in the
picture (individual)

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T asks some Ss to say aloud and
corrects.

3. Post-speaking

- T sets the scene: Mrs. Vui bought new
furniture for her living room, but she
can’t decide where to put it. You should
help her to arrange the furniture.

- Ss read the words in the box.

* Vocabulary

rug (n) : thảm, tấm thảm trải sàn
calendar (n) : lÞch

counter (n) : quÇy

dish rack (n) : giá đựng bát đĩa
wardrobe (n) : tủ quần áo
knife (n) : dao

( plural: knives)

1. Look at the picture. Talk about the 
position of each item.

Example:

- The fruit is in the bowl.
- The dish is on the table.
- The calendar is on the wall.

2. Arrange the furniture.
Example:

S1: Let’s put the armchair opposite the
couch.

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

- Ss say the name of each item in the
picture.

- T introduces the example and guides.
- Ss work in pairs to say their ideas.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.

- Say ideas:
+ Let’s put ...
+ We ought to …
+ We should …
- Agree:

OK.

You are right.
- Disagree:

No, I think we’d better/ ought to …
I think it should be …

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Write sentences to describe your living room/ bedroom.
- Do exercise 7 on page 26 in workbook.

Note: Mỗi ô là một chữ cái.Ô đen không viết.

A: hµng ngang, B: hµng däc
Ex: D3

- Prepare part: Listen + Language focus 3,4.

Read the lesson before and find new words with their meanings.

Preparing date: 19/09/2011 Teaching date: 22 /09/ 2011

Period 14

unit 3: At home

Lesson 3: Listen 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to identify the right item by listening
and know how to cook the dish: “Special Chinese Fried Rice”.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape.
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

Test 15’

Question I: Put these words in the suitable column (9p)

armchair steamer bookshelf opposite under
above stove refrigerator alarm clock between
dish rack bed near coffee table

counter lamp rug couch

Kitchen Living room Bedroom Prepositions of place

Question II: Using the given words to write the completed sentences(1p)
1. armchair / be/ opposite/ couch

2. let’s / put / calendar/ next/ clock

*Answer key and marks (one correct word or sentences get 0.5p):Question I

Kitchen

dish rack

Living room

armchair

Bedroom

bed

Prepositions of place

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

counter
steamer
stove
refrigerator

rug

coffee table
couch

lamp
bookshelf
alarm clock

opposite
under
between
above
Question II

1. The armchair is opposite the couch
2. Let’s put the calendar next to the clock

I/ Warm up

Bingo

- Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 30 and write names of 5 items.

- T reads: frying pan, steamer, garlic, noodles, rice, pepper, ham, peas, chicken,
onion.

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-listening

- T introduces situation and requirement.
- Call on Ss to say the names of items in
the pictures.

- Ss predict 4 items to cook “Special
Chinese Fried Rice”

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape to check their
prediction.

- Ss share with a partner.
- Ss listen again and correct.
- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to retell how to cook the
“Special Chinese Fried Rice”
-Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Prediction
a.

b.
c.
d.

2. Listening
a. fried rice
b. pan

c. garlic and green peppers
d. ham and peas

3. Retelling
* Material
* How to cook

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Do exercises 3, 5 on pages 22, 24.

Exercise 3: Complete each sentence with given verbs and reflexive pronouns.
Example: in book

Exercise 5: Match question “Why” with answer “Because”.
Example: a – D

- Prepare part: Read.

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23>

Preparing date: 23/09/2011 Teaching date: 26 /09/ 2011

Period 15

unit 3: At home

Lesson 4: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the safety precautions
in the house.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, .

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Brainstorming

electricity

II/ New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
translation

realia
realia
translation
noun of “safe”

example
picture

realia
realia

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces situation of the text.

- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess
which is true, which is false.

- T explains difficult sentences.
- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks 2 Ss.

2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to correct false sentences.
- T explains the examples.

- Ss read the questions and then read the
text again to find answers to the

questions.

* Vocabulary

precaution (n) : sự phòng ngừa
socket (n) : ổ cắm điện
match (n) : que diêm
object (n) : vật, đồ vật
safety (n) : sự an toàn
destroy (v) : phá huỷ
injure (v) : làm bị thơng
bead (n) : hạt, vật tròn nhỏ
scissors (n) : cái kéo

1. Answer: True or False

*Prediction Reading
a. F
b. T
c. F

d. F
e. T
f. T
* Correction

c. suitable dangerous
d. cannot can

2. Ask and answer

b. Because the kitchen is a dangerous
place.

c. Because playing with one match can
cause the fire.

</div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

- Ss work in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-reading

- Ss discuss in groups of 7,8.
- Call on Ss to say their ideas.

- T collects and writes on the board.

d. Because children often try to put
something into electrical sockets and
electricity can kill.

e. Because the dangerous objects can
injure or kill children

3. Discussion

Topic: Safety precaution at school

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Do exercise 6 on page 25.

Read each situation and write questions and answer.
Example: in book.

- Prepare part: Write

Read the lesson before and find new words with their meanings.
Revise vocabulary of furniture.

Preparing date: 25/09/2011 Teaching date: 28 /09/ 2011

Period 16

Unit 3: At home
Lesson 5: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a description of a room in
their house.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, .

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- divide the class into 2 teams.

- Team1: write words about furniture in living room.
- Team 2: write words about furniture in kitchen

- Which team writes more correct words is winner.
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-writing

- T shows the picture to introduce
vocabulary.

realia
picture
picture
mime
picture

*Vocabulary

folder (n) : b×a cøng

oven (n) : lò (để hấp bánh)
towel rack (n) : giá phơi khăn
beneath (prep) : ơ dới

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

realia
Checking: What and Where

- Ask Ss to look at the picture and read
the description.

- T asks some comprehension questions.

2. While-writing

- T introduces the picture and explains
requirement.

- Ss run through the given words.
- T does model first two sentences.
- Ss write individual. (10’)

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- T calls on Ss to read each sentence.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Post-writing

- Ask Ss to talk their partners about their
rooms/ living rooms/kitchen.

- Ss work in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

vase with flowers (n) : lä hoa

1. Read the description of Hoa’s 
 room.

Answer the questions:

a. What is on the left of the room?
b. Where is the bookshelf?

c. Where is the window?
d. What is opposite the desk?
2. Write a description of the kitchen.
Example:

This is Hoa’s kitchen.

There is a refrigerator in the right corner

of the room.

Next to the refrigerator is the stove and
oven.

On the other side of the oven is a sink
and next to the sink is a towel rack.
The dish rack is on the counter, to the
right of the window and beneath the
shelves.

On the shelves and on the counter
beneath the window, there are jars of
sugar, flour and tea.

In the middle of the kitchen, there is a
table and four chairs.

The lighting fixture is above the table
and beneath the lighting fixture is a vase
of flowers.

3. Write a description of a room in 
your house.

E/ Guiding -Homework

- Write description of a room in your house.
- Read and do exercises 1, 2 of Language focus.

Revise modal verbs: have to, must and ought to.

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

Period 17

unit 3: At home

Lesson 6: Language focus

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use modal verbs “have to, must,
ought to” and “why – because” to practice.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, .

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Chatting

- T asks some Ss: What do you have to do at home?/ at school?
Do you have to wash your clothes?

II/ New lesson

- T guides and asks Ss to say the form of
“must/ have to”

- T explains the example.

- Ss read the given verbs and say their
meanings.

- Ss look at the pictures and complete the
dialogue individually.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- One pair read the dialogue aloud.
- T asks Ss to look at the picture a) and
explains the example.

- What is form of verb after “ought to”?
- What does it mean?

- How is it used?

- Ss look at the pictures and give advice
to each person.

- Call on some Ss to write sentences on
the board.

- T corrects.

- T introduces model sentence.

- When do we use reflexive pronouns?
- Where do they stand?

- T guides Ss to do the exercise.
- Ss read the pronouns.

- Ss complete each dialogue in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Complete the dialogue.
must/ have to + infinitive

(1) must/ have to tidy
(2) must/ have to dust
(3) must/ have to clean
(4) must/ have to sweep
(5) must/ have to empty
(6) must/ have to feed

2. Use “ought to” to give advices to 
these people.

Example:

You ought to study harder.
- Form: ought to + infinitive
- Meaning: nên làm gì đó
- Use: ought to = should

It is used to advice someone to do
something.

b. You ought to get up earlier.
c. You ought to eat more vegetable.
d. You ought to see a dentist.

3. Complete the dialogues.
* Model sentence:

He did it himself.

- Reflexive pronouns: myself, yourself,
yourselves, ourselves, themselves,
himself, herself, itself.

- They stand at the end of sentences or
after subject/ object to emphasize.
* Key:

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- T asks Ss to look at the picture a) and
say its meaning.

- Ss read the example.

- Ss say the use of “why- because”
- Ss look at the picture and practice in
pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

4. Ask and answer

b. S1: Why did Nam have to cook
dinner?

S2: Because his mother was home
late.

c. S1: Why was Mrs. Vui was home
late?

S2: Because she had to see his
grandmother, she was sick.
d. S1: Why did Ha failed her English
exam?

S2: Because she didn’t learn for her
exam. She played the computer
games.

e. S1: Why didn’t Nga go to the movies?
S2: Because she had to do her chores.
E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.

- Do exercise 2 on page 20 in workbook.

Read situations and give advice, use form of “ought to”.

Example: You ought to stop playing computer games.
- Revise knowledge in units 1,2,3.

Preparing date: 30 /10/2011 Teaching date: 03 /10/ 2011

Week 7

Period 18

revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to revise and further practice
knowledge in units 1,2,3.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming

rug

II/ New lesson

- T writes the exercise on the board and

I/ Supply the correct tense for the

verbs in brackets.

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

guides.

- Ss read and write correct form of verbs.
- T checks and corrects.

* Key:

(1) came (4) go
(2) lives (5) likes
(3) study (6) are
(7) will visit
- T guides.

- Ss read and complete each sentence.
- T checks and corrects.

*Key:

1. on 4. from
2. to 5. on
3. at …at

- T guides.

- Ss read and complete each sentence.
- T checks and corrects.

* Key:

1. ought to 2. have to
3. is going to

4. enough

- T guides.

- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

Mai is Lien’s friend. She (1.come) to
Hanoi last year. Now Mai (2.live) with
her aunt in Hanoi. The two girls

(3.study) in the same class at Tran Phu
school. Everyday they (4.go) to school
together. Mai (5.like) studying and
playing with Lien. Now they (6.be) on
their summer vacation. They (7.visit)
Hue next week.

II/ Complete the sentences with the 
appropriate prepositions. (extra-board)
1. What’s ….. television tonight.

2. Can I speak ….. Phong, please?
3. Let’s meet …. school …. 7:00

tomorrow morning.

4. The school is far .….my house.
5. I’m usually free ….. Sunday.

III/ Complete the sentences with have 
to, ought to, be going to, enough in 
correct form.

1. You …. study hard.
2. He …. stop smoking.

3. He is learning to drive. He …. a
driver.

4. She is tall …. to reach the
shelf.

IV/ Write a paragraph about you, use 
the following questions.

1. What is your name?
2. How old are you?
3. What do you look like?
4. What are you like?
5. Where do you live?
6. Who do you live with?
7. Who are your friends?

D/ Guiding - Homework

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Preparing date: 02 /10/2011 Teaching date: 05 /10/ 2011
Period 19

Test 45’
A. Objectives:

- To check students’ result of study in Units 1-3
B. Matrix

Tên chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Cấp độ thấpVận dụngCấp độ cao Cộng

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL

Listening

Listen to a short
recording about

personal
information

Listen to a short
recording about

personal
information

Số câu hỏi 2 2 4

Số điểm 1 1 2 (20%)

Phonetics Pronunciation ofnew words in
Units 1-3

Sè câu hỏi 5 5

Số điểm 1 1(10%)

Language

Focus Reflexive

pronouns

present simple,
past simple, be
going to, modal

verbs, adj +
enough

Sè c©u hái 2 6 8

Sè ®iÓm 0.5 1.5 2 (20%)

Reading Read a passage about personal information and answer the questions

Sè c©u hái 4 1 5

Sè ®iĨm 2 0.5 2.5 (25%)

Writing Write a short paragragh with

wordcues

Sè câu hỏi 8 2 10

Số điểm 2 0.5 2.5 (25%)

Tổng số câu
Tổng số diểm
Tỷ lệ

9 câu
2.5 điểm

25 %

6 câu
3 điểm

30 %

17 câu
4.5 điểm

45 %

Số câu:

32
Điểm: 10

C. Content

Question1: Listen then decide if each statement is True (T) or False (F). (2 pts)
...1. Peter is 14 years old.

...2. He lives in a house.

...3. He always works hard and gets good marks.
...4. He likes playing tennis and basketball.

Question2: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the
rest. (Chän tõ cã phÇn gạch chân phát âm khác với những từ còn lại) (1 pt)

1. A. feed B. clean C. sweep D. head

2. A. sink B. knife C. fire D. rice

3. A. slim B. thin C. smile D. visit

4. A. character B. children C. chemical D. school
5. A. happy B. character C. fat D. classmate
Question3:Choose the best option to complete each sentence. (2 pts)
1. I ... a letter from my old friend last week.

a. sent b. received c. will get d. receive
2. Lan ought to...hard for her exam.

a. studies b. studied c. studying d. study
3. Hung repaired his bicycle ...

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

a. is going b. went c. will go d. goes
5. The weather is warm enough ... swimming

a. going b. go c. to go d. to going

6. The Earth ... around the sun.

a. went b. moves c. will go d. moved

7. Let’s put the table...the couch and the armchairs

a. on b. under c. in d. between

8. You must do your homework ...

a. yourself b. themselvesc. himself d. ourselves.
Question4: Read the following passage, then answer the questions. (2.5pts)

Do you have any close friends? I think everybody has at least one close friend in his life. And
so do I. I have two close friends: Linh and Mai. We are in the same class. We are also
neighbors, so we spend most of our time studying and playing together. Mai is a beautiful girl
with black eyes and an oval face. She is an intelligent student and always studies the best in my
class. She also likes reading. Linh isn’t as beautiful as Mai but she has a lovely smile and looks
very healthy. Linh is very sporty. She spends most of her free time playing sports. Linh is a
badminton player in our school team. She is very sociable and has a good sense of humor. Her
jokes always make us laugh. I love both of my friends and I hope our friendship will never die.
1. What does Mai look like?

2. What does she like doing?
3. Does Linh play badminton?
4. What is Linh like?

5. Are Linh and Mai classmates?

Question5: Complete the sentences using the words given. (2.5pts)
1. My friend’s name/ be/ Tran Van Nam

2. He / be/ thirteen/ years old.

3. He/ live/ Le Loi Street/ Hai Duong City.
4. He/ live/ his parents/ his younger sister, Hoa.
5. He/ be/ tall/ fat/ have/ short black hair.
6. He/ be/ outgoing/ humorous/ helful.
7. Nam/ student/ Nguyen Trai School.
8. He/ be/ Class 8A.

9. There/ be/ 35 students/ his class.

10. Hung/Cuong/ Khai/ be/ his close friends.

The listening text

(The teacher reads the text twice)

Hello, my name is Peter. I am thirteen years old. I live in a house. I am a good student. I always
work hard at school and get good marks. At school I have a lot of Vietnamese friends. We
study in the same class. I like playing soccer and baseball in my free time. Next summer, I am

going to visit Thailand. I hope to have a good time in Thailand.

D. Answer key and mark

Question 1 : 2pts( 0,5for each correct answer)

1F 2.T 3.T 4.F

Question 2 : 1pts( 0,2 for each correct answer)

1.D 2.A 3.C. 4. B 5.D

Question 3 : 2pts( 0,25for each correct answer)

1.b 2.d 3.c 4.a

5.c 6.b 7.d 8.a

Question 4 : 2,5pts( 0,5for each correct answer)

1. Mai is a beautiful girl with black eyes and an oval face.
2. She likes reading

3. Yes, she does.
4. Linh is sporty.
5. Yes, they are

Question 5 : 2,5pts( 0,25for each correct answer)
1. My friend’s name is Tran Van Nam

2. He is thirteen years old.

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

5. He is tall and fat and he has short black hair.
6. He is out going, humorous and helpful.
7. Nam is a student of Nguyen Trai School.
8. He is in class 8A

9. There are thirteen students in his class.

10. Hung, Cuong and Khai are his close friends.

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Do the test again.

Preparing date: 03 /10/2011 Teaching date: 06 /10/ 2011
Period 20

correcting the test
A/ Objectives

- Ss know the correct answer of the test.

- To correct the Ss’ typical mistakes in the test.
B/ Teaching aids:

test papers.

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Chatting
1. Is the test difficult or easy?

2. How many exercises are there in the test?
3. Which exercise easy/ difficult?

4. How many marks do you think you will get?
II/New lesson.

- T gives Ss their test papers.

- Ss read and do the test again individual
(5’).

- Ask Ss to compare with a partner.
- Ask Ss to write the answers on the
board.

- T checks and corrects.

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes in the
test.

- Ss write prepositions of place
incorrectly.

A/ Answer of the test.

Question 1 : 2pts( 0,5for each correct answer)

1F 2.T 3.T 4.F

Question 2 : 1pts( 0,2 for each correct 
answer)

1.D 2.A 3.C.

4. B 5.D

Question 3 : 2pts( 0,25for each correct answer)

1.b 2.d 3.c 4.a

5.c 6.b 7.d 8.a

Question 4 : 2,5pts( 0,5for each correct 
answer)

6. Mai is a beautiful girl with black
eyes and an oval face.

7. She likes reading
8. Yes, she does.
9. Linh is sporty.
10. Yes, they are

Question 5 : 2,5pts( 0,25for each correct 
answer)

1. My friend’s name is Tran Van Nam
2. He is thirteen years old.

3. She lives on Le Loi street in Hai Duong
City.

4. He lives with his parents and his younger
sister,Hoa

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

- Some Ss use structures incorrectly.
- Some Ss have mistakes in direction.
- Some Ss choose wrong answers.

- Some Ss use structures incorrectly.

6. He is out going, humorous and helpful.
7. Nam is a student of Nguyen Trai School.
8. He is in class 8A

9. There are thirteen students in his class.
10. Hung, Cuong and Khai are his close
friends.

B/ Typical mistakes.
I/ Listening

Example:

II/ Reading

Ex:

III/ Phonentic

IV/ Language focus

IV/ Writing
Ex:

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Prepare Unit 4: Getting started + Listen and read.

Read the lesson before, find new words with their meanings.
Week 08

Period 21

Preparing date: 07 /10/2011 Teaching date: 10 /10/ 2011
unit 4: our past

Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

- By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to tell the activities which people
used to do in the past.

B/ Teaching aids:

test papers, cassette player, tape

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- T shows the picture in book and
explains requirement.

- Ss look at the picture and find.

I/ Getting started

Look at the picture. Write the names of
the things that do not belong to the past.

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

- Ss compare with a partner.

- 2 Ss write their answers on the board.
- T checks and corrects.

II/ Listen and read

- T introduces the picture and situation
of the dialogue.

- Ask Ss to look at book, listen to tape
and find new words.

- T elicits vocabulary.
situation

situation
translation
example
realia

explanation
explanation

*Checking: What and Where

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
find new structures.

- Ss listen and copy.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs
(5’).

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T calls on 2 or 3 pairs to read the
dialogue aloud.

- T listens and corrects Ss’
pronunciation.

- T introduced the questions.
- T explains difficult questions if
necessary.

- Ss read the dialogue again and answer
the questions in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- T explains the difference between Fact
and opinion.

- T does model past a.

- Ss read the sentences and check.
- T checks and corrects.

III/ Production

- Ask Ss to make sentences, using “used
to + infinitive”.

- T checks and corrects.

- The television
- The mobile phone
- The lighting fixture
- The modern clothes
- The school uniform
II/ Listen and read
* Vocabulary

(to) look after : tr«ng nom, chăm sóc
Great-grandma (n) : cụ bà

sound (v) : nghe nh
equipment (n) : thiÕt bÞ

folktale (n) : chuyện dân gian
traditional (adj) : truyền thống
lit (past of light) : đốt, thắp
*Grammar

I used to live on a farm when I was a
young girl.

“used to + infinitive” to express past
habit or activities which happened in the
past but now don’t happen any more.
Example: I used to walk to school five
years ago.

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

2. Ask and answer the questions.
a. She used to live on a farm.

b. Because she had to stay at home and
help her mom to look after her younger
brothers and sisters.

c. She used to cook the meals, clean the
house and wash the clothes.

d. They used to lit the lamp and tell
stories.

e. She asked her grandmother to tell her
the tale “The Lost Shoe”.

3. Fact or opinion?

a. F d. F
b. F e. O
c. F f. O

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

- Read the dialogue again.

- Prepare part: Speak + Language focus 4.
Read the lesson before.

Week 08
Period 22

Preparing date: 09 /10/2011 Teaching date: 12 /10/ 2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use “used to” to talk about things
they used to and do language focus 4.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, pictures

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Matching
A B
1. electricity a. chỵ
2. entertainment b. vÊt v¶
3. market c. hàng hoá
4. supermarket d. gi¶i trÝ
5. hard e. siêu thị
6. goods f. ®iƯn
*Key: 1 – f, 2 – d, 3 – a, 4 – e, 5 – b, 6 – c .
II/ New lesson

1. Presentation
T asks:

- Where did Nga’s grandmother live?
- Where does she live now? (in city)
- What is form of verb after “used to”?
- When do we use “used to”?

- What does it mean?

2. Practice

- T introduces the pictures and
requirements.

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and
compare lives in the past and now.
- T does model.

- T elicits some ideas.
- Ss work in pairs. (7’).

- Ss can compare activities out of the
pictures.

- T goes around and helps Ss.

I. Speak

*Model sentences

She used to live on a farm.
- Form: used to + infinitive

- Use: to express a past habit or an action
that usually happened in the past, but
now it doesn’t.

- Meaning: đã thờng

Example: I used to get up late when I
was 5 years old.

1. Work with a partner.
Example:

In the past, people used to live in
small houses. Now they live in big
houses and buildings.

- Travel: walk – by car, motorbike,
- Electricity: No – Yes

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

- T checks and corrects.
3. Production

- T introduces and guides.
- T explains the example.

- Ss work with a partner. Each student
says 5 sentences.

- T checks and corrects.
1.Pre-listening

- T elicits some new words.
explanation

situation
translation

example
realia

- T introduces situation and requirement
of the exercise.

- Ss read four moral lessons and predict.
- T checks 2 Ss.

2. While-listening

- Ss listen to the tape and check their
prediction.

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to tell a story they know.
- Others listen and give moral lesson.

modern games

II/ Listen
* Vocabulary

(to) lay – laid – laid : đẻ trứng

amazement (n) : sự kinh ngạc,
foolish (adj) : dại dột, ngu xuẩn
greedy (adj) : tham lam

gold (n) : vµng

1. Listen and choose the most suitable 
moral lesson

* Prediction
* Listening

b. Don’t be foolish and greedy.
2. Tell a story

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercise 4 in notebook.
- Do exercise 4 on page 29 in workbook.

+ T introduces the requirement.

+ Example: a - g: He used to do a lot of exercises.
- Prepare part: Read.

Read the lesson and do the exercises before.

Week 08
Period 23

Preparing date: 10 /10/2011 Teaching date: 13 /10/ 2011
unit 4: our past

Lesson 3: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand and retell the story
“The Lost Shoe”.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Chatting
- Have you read folktales?

- Name some stories you read.

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
situation
translation

example

translation

>< happy
translation

- T introduces the text by asking Ss:
+ Do you like reading folktale?
+ Did you read the story “The Lost
Shoe”?

+ Now we’re reading it.

- Ask Ss read the exercise 1 on page 42
and predict words to complete the
sentences.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While- reading

- Ask Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the words and their
meanings.

- Ask Ss to read the text again and
match.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the words in chorus.

- Ask Ss to read the questions and say
their meanings.

- Ss read the text again to answer the
questions.

- Ss work individual, then compare with
a partner.

- Ask some pairs to ask and answer the
questions aloud.

- T listens and corrects.
3. Post-reading

- T asks Ss to work in 4 groups to retell
the story in details.

- T checks and corrects.

*Vocabulary

cruel (adj) : độc ác

harvest festival (n) : ngµy héi mïa
fairy (n) : tiªn

magically (adv) : kú diÖu
upset (adj) : buån phiÒn
(to) fall in love with : yêu, phải lòng
1. Complete the sentences with words 
from the story.

*Prediction
*Reading

a. farmer
b. died

c. had - again
d. choose
e. new clothes
f. lost

* Match

A B
1. wife a. hoµng tư
2. daughter b. vỵ

3. marry c. nghÌo
4. chore d. lµm r¬i
5. a broken heart e. con g¸i
6. prince f. cíi

7. poor g. viƯc vặt
8. drop h. sự đau khæ
* Key:

1 - b 2 - e 3 - f 4 - g
5 - h 6 - a 7 - c 8 - d
2. Answer the questions

a. She was a poor farmer’s daughter.
b. She made her do the chores all day.
c. Before the festival started, a fairy
appeared and magically changed her
rags into beautiful clothes.

d. He decided to marry Little Pea.
e. up to Ss.

Ex: - No, it isn’t. My grandmother told
me.

- Yes, it is.
3. Retell

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the answers in notebook.

- Do exercise 3 on page 28 in workbook.

Write questions, base on the answers and reverse.

Example: a. How did you go to school?

- Prepare part: Write

Read the exercises before and do them.

Week 09
Period 24

Preparing date: 14 /10/2011 Teaching date: 17 /10/ 2011
unit 4: our past

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use Simple Past tense to write a
folktale.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Chatting
- Have you read story “Tri khon cua ta day”?
- Can you tell the story? (in Vietnamese )

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Rewrite the story, imagine you are the tiger or buffalo.
- Prepare part: Listen + Language focus

- Read the exercises and do them before.
1. Pre-writing

- T elicits some new words.
visual
realia
translation

>< master
translation

mime
translation

situation

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces requirement of the
exercise.

- Ask Ss to read and say the meanings of
the verbs in the box.

- T explains the example.

- Ss complete the story individual.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
Noughts and Crosses

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

2. While-writing

- T explains the requirement and
example.

- T notes Ss the change of tense of verbs
and pronouns.

- Ss read the given words and say the
content in Vietnamese.

- Ss write individual.

*Vocabulary
stripe (n) : sọc vằn
straw (n) : rơm rạ
master (n) : ông chủ

servant (n) : kẻ hầu
wisdom (n) : trí khôn
tie (v) : trói, buộc
escape (v) : trốn thoát
graze (v) : gặm cỏ

1. Complete the story. Use the verbs in
the box.

Ex: (0) was grazing
(1) appeared
(2) was
(3) said
(4) left
(5) went
(6) tied
(7) lit
(8) burned
(9) escaped

2. Now imagine you are the man. Use 
the words to write the story.

Note:

- Change the farmer/ He into I
his my
him me

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

Week 09

Period 25

Preparing date: 16 /10/2011 Teaching date: 19 /10/ 2011
unit 4: our past

Lesson 5: Language focus 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the main idea of a
story by listening and practice further Past Simple tense and prepositions of time.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Write past simple form of each verb (Language focus 1)

Group 1 Verbs Group 2
1. run

2. fly
3. take
4. go
5. have
6. do
7. be
8. write

9. eat
10. sit
11. come

*Key: 1. ran 2. flew 3. took 4. went 5. had 6. did
7. was/were 8. rode 9. ate 10. sat 11. came

II/ New lesson

- Ask Ss to read the verb and their past
simple forms in Warm up.

- Ask Ss to give more verbs and their
past simple forms they know.

- Ss write on the board.

- T checks, corrects and asks Ss to read
in chorus.

- T introduces the requirement and
guides.

- Ask one pair to do model part a.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.
- T asks Ss to retell the form, use of Past
Simple tense.

1. Write the past simple form of verbs.
Example:

(to) learn – learnt

2. Complete the dialogues.
a. Did you eat rice for lunch?
b. I rode a bike to school. /
I got to school by bike. /
I walked to school.

c. Where were you (yesterday morning)?
d. I had English, Math, … yesterday.
* Past Simple tense

- Form: (+) S + V_ed / P …

(-) S + didn’t + infinitive …
(?) Did +S + infinitive…

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

- T explains requirement and example.
- Ss look at the table and complete the
sentences.

- Ss work individual.

- Ask some Ss to read the sentences
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- Ask Ss to say the use of the
prepositions.

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy.

- T sets the scene: Hoa and Nga are
looking at Hoa’s photo album. They are
talking about Hoa and her family in
Hue.

- T explains requirement and example.
- Ss work in pairs to complete the
dialogue. (2’)

- T checks and corrects.

- T hangs the picture on the board and
asks Ss to make sentences, using “used
to”.

- Ss work in 4 groups.

- T checks, corrects and gives marks to
each group.

Example:

a. I’ll see you on Wednesday.

b. in

c. between
d. at … after
e. before

*Prepositions of time

on + day of week, date of month
in + month, year

between … and …
after / before + time

4. Look at the pictures and complete 
the dialogue, use used to and the “ ”
verbs in the box.

(1) used to stay
(2) used to have
(3) used to be
(4) used to live

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.

- Do exercise 2 on page 27 in workbook.

- Prepare Unit 5: Getting started + Listen and read

Week 09
Period 26

Preparing date: 17 /10/2011 Teaching date: 20 /10/ 2011
unit 5: study habits

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the dialogue between
Tim and his Mom about his studying.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- T explains requirements and example.
- T calls on one pair to do model.

- Ss work in pairs (2’)

- T asks some pairs to ask answer aloud.
- T corrects.

II/ Listen and read

I/ Getting started

Ask and answer about schedule.
Example:

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- T introduces situation and gives 2
questions.

- Ss look at book and listen to tape to
answer the questions.

- Call on some Ss to answer.
- T listens and corrects.
Key: a. Yes, he did.

b. He needed to improve Spanish
pronunciation.

- T elicits some new words.
translation

picture
= very good

situation
half of a school year

example
translation

Checking: Matching

- T asks Ss to read the dialogue again to
find model sentences.

- T guides Ss to find new structures.
- Ss listen and copy.

- Ss listen the dialogue again, and then
read it in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- Call on some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the sentences in exercise
2 and say their meanings.

- Ss read the dialogue again and answer.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to correct false sentences.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the questions and say

their meanings.

- Ss read the dialogue again and find
answer.

- Ss work in pairs.

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer.
- T checks and corrects.

* Comprehension questions:
a. Did Tim study well?

b. What subject did he need to improve?

*Vocabulary

pronunciation (n) : c¸ch phát âm
report card (n) : phiÕu ®iĨm
excellent (adj) : xuÊt s¾c
(to) be proud of : tù hµo
semester (n) : häc kú
improve (v) : c¶i thiƯn

(to) try one’s best : cè g¾ng hÕt søc
* Grammar

a. Miss Jackson said you should work
harder on your Spanish pronunciation.
S 1+ said + S2 + should + infinitive…

advice in reported speech

b. She asked me to give you this
dictionary.

S + asked + O + to-infinitive + …
request in reported speech

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

2. True or False?

a. F d. T
b. T e. F
c. F f. T
* Correction

a. out at home
c. poor excellent
e. grammar pronunciation
3. Answer the questions

a. She is Tim’s teacher.

b. She gave Tim’s mother his report
card.

c. He studied very well.

d. She said Tim should work harder on

his Spanish pronunciation.

e. She gave him a dictionary.
E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

Note: (to) salute the colors: chµo cê
- Prepare part: Speak + Listen

Read the lesson before, find new words with their meanings

Week 10
Period 27

Preparing date: 21 /10/2011 Teaching date: 24 /10/ 2011
unit 5: study habits

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about their study habits and
listen for specific information to fill in a report card.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming

speak English to friends in class
- Divide the class into 2 groups.

- The groups write on the board in 2 minutes.
- T checks and gives marks.

Example answers:
+do grammar exercises
+ read English story

+ read English newspapers

+ listen to English radio programs
+ watch English programs on TV
...

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-speaking

- T introduces requirements, questions
and given words.

- T explains what Ss don’t understand.
- T guides Ss to make a survey.

- T draws a table on the board.
- Ss copy the table in notebook.

- T asks a good student and does model.
2. While-speaking

- Ss work in groups of 3,4 to complete
the survey. (7’)

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T corrects Ss’ mistakes on the board.
- Ask some pairs to ask and answer
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.
3. Post-speaking

- Ask Ss to look at their survey and write
about one of their friends.

I/ Speak

1. Take a survey
Questions Lan

1
2
3
4
5

after dinner

brother, Nam

Example:

T: When do you do your homework?
Lan: I do my homework after dinner.
T: Who helps you with your homework?
Lan: My brother, Nam, helps me with
my homework.

....

2. Writing
Example:

Lan said she did her homework after

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

- T does model.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ss can write at home if not enough
time.

1.Pre-listening

- T elicits some new words.
translation
explanation

translation
explanation
>< satisfactory

realia
visual

- T introduces requirement and report
card.

- Ss read the report card and predict
missing information.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape 2 times to check their
prediction.

- Ss share with a partner.

- T calls on some Ss to say their answers.
- T corrects and writes on the board.
3. Post-listening

- Ss write their report cards for last
school year.

- Ss work individual.
- T checks and corrects.

dinner. Her brother, Nam, helped her
with her homework….

II/ Listen
a. Vocabulary

behavior (n) : hµnh vi, cö chØ
participation (n) : sù tham gia
co-operation (n) : sù hỵp tác
satisfactory (adj) : thoả mÃn

unsatisfactory (adj) : không thoả mÃn
comment (n) : lêi nhËn xÐt
signature (n) : ch÷ ký

b. Prediction c. Listening
1. ... 87 days
2. …….. 5 days
3. ……... S
4. C
5. A
6. A
7. B

8. Miss Blake
d. Write your report card.

D/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 4 on page 35 in work book.
Ex: I swim very fast.

- Prepare: Read

Write the ways you learn new words.
Week 10

Period 28

Preparing date: 23 /10/2011 Teaching date: 26 /10/ 2011
unit 5: study habits

Lesson 3: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the text and do
exercise 1(T/F statements)then show some way of learning new words.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Chatting
- T asks Ss some questions:

1. Do you like learning English?

2. How do you learn English new words?
- Ss answer.

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
situation

mime
translation

mime
mime

Checking: Rub out and Remember

- asks Ss to make a list of ways of
learning new words

- sets the scene: Now you read a text
about how people learn new words and
compare with your ways/ opinions

- T introduces the text and exercise.
- Ss read the sentences in exercise

True/False and say their meanings.
- Ss predict.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-reading

- Ss read the text to checks their
prediction (5’).

- Ss share with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to correct false sentences.
- T corrects.

* Vocabulary

mother tongue (n) : tiếng mẹ đẻ
stick (v) : đính, gn

(to) come across : tình cờ

underline (v) : gạch chân (dòng chữ)
highlight (v) : làm nổi bật

1. True or False

Prediction Reading
a. F

b. T
c. F
d. T
* Correction

a. All Some
c. Every Many

E.Consolidation:

Brainstorming

write English words and their translations

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Week 10
Period 29

Preparing date: 25 /10/2011 Teaching date: 28 /10/ 2011
unit 5: study habits

Lesson 3: Read (cont)
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to clearly understand the text
by answer question about the text and take a survey about learning new words
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

Test 15’
Read the passage

There are different ways to learn all words. Some learners make a list and try to learn
all words by heart. However, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example
sentences with each new word to remember how to use the word in the right way. Many
language learners do not try to learn all new words they come across. They usually
underline or highlight the important words. To sum up, language learners should try
different ways of learning words so as to find out the best way.

a. Answer True or False.

1. Learners learn words in the same ways.
2. Some learners try to learn all words by heart.

3. All language learners don’t try to learn all the words they come across.
b. Answer the questions.

1. Do learners learn words in different ways?
2. How should language learners learn words?

Answer and mark
a. 3 marks – each correct answer is 2 marks.

1. F 2. T 3. F

b. 2 marks – each correct answer is 2 marks.
1. Yes, they do.

2. They should try different ways of learning words so as to find out the best way.
I/ Warm up

?S1: Write new words of the text
? How did you learn these new words?
? is it faster or slower?

II/ New lesson

2.While – reading(cont)

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

meanings.

- Ss read the text again and find out
answers. Ss work in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks: Lucky numbers.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b e LK a LK f LK d
- T listens and corrects.

3. Post-reading

- T guides Ss to take survey.
- Ss copy the table.

- Ss work in small groups to complete
the survey.

- T calls on some groups to ask and
answer aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- askss to report their survey

b. Because it helps them remember how
to use the words in the right way.

c. They write each word and its use on a
small piece of paper and stick

somewhere in their house and underline
or highlight the words they want to
learn.

d. Because they want to learn only
important words.

e. Revision is necessary in learning new
words.

f. We should try different ways of

learning words to find out the best way
for ourselves.

3. Survey

How do you learn new words? S1 S2

1. Make a list of words with
their meanings and learn by
heart.

2. Write example sentences
with new words.

3. Stick new words some
where in the house.

4. Underline and highlight
new words.

5. Learn words through songs.
*Report survey:

Eg: …(S1) learns new words by making
a list of words with their meanings and
learn by heart.

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Read and translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Complete your survey report.

Week 11
Period 30

Preparing date: 28 /10/2011 Teaching date: 31 /10/ 2011
unit 5: study habits

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know the form of a friendly letter
and practice a writing letter to a friend.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up 
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-writing

- T asks Ss some questions:

+ Do you often write letter to someone?
+ Who do you often write to?

+ What do you often write about?

+ How many parts are there in a letter?

1. Identify the sections and label them 
with correct letter.

B. Heading: writer’s address and date
D. Opening: Dear ...,

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

What are they?

- T introduces the requirements.

- Ss read the letter and say parts of the
letter.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ss say content of each part of a letter.

2. While-writing

- T introduces situation and requirement
- Ss read the given words and compare
with Hoa’s letter.

- T does model the first sentence.
- Ss write individual. (10’)

- T goes around and helps Ss.

3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T reads and corrects some writings on
the board.

idea in one paragraph

C. Closing: Regards,/ Your friends, /
Love

2. Now help Lan write a letter to her 
pen pal, Donna.

Lan’s address
Date

Dear Donna,

Thank you for your letter. I’m pleased to
hear you had a happy/enjoyable Mother
Day.

I received my second semester report
last month. I got good grades for
Geography, Physics and Math, but my

English and History results were poor.
My teacher told me to improve English
and History. I think I’ll have to study
harder next school year.

In a few weeks we are going to celebrate
the Mid-Autumn Festival. That’s a moon
festival in Autumn in Vietnam. I’m
going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and
uncle by bus this afternoon. I’ll send you
a post card from there.

Write soon and tell me all your news.
Best,/ Regards,/ Love,

Lan

3. Correction
Note:

- Tất cả các chữ đầu dòng phải
thẳng hàng.

- Các đoạn cách nhau mét dßng.

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the letter in notebook.
- Prepare the part: Language focus.

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

Week 11
Period 31

Preparing date: 30 /11/2011 Teaching date: 02 /11/ 2011
unit 5: study habits

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use adverbs of manner, modal
“should” as an advice and use reported speech with command, request and advice.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Pelmanism
Adjectives – Adverbs

soft good fast hard bad quick slow

softly well fast hard badly quickly slowly

II/ New lesson

- T introduces and guides.

- Ss read the adverbs and say their
meanings.

- T explains the example.

- Ss work in pairs to complete the
dialogues.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to say the form and use of
adverbs of manner.

- T introduces situation (in book).
- T explains the example.

- Ss read the example to find the

difference between direct commands and
reported speech.

- Ss say the form of indirect commands
and requests.

- T writes on the board.
- Ss copy.

- Ss work with a partner to report the
sentences.

- T checks and corrects.

1/ Complete the dialogues.
(1) hard

(2) fast
(3) badly
(4) softly

- Form: adj + ly = adverb

- Use: to express common verbs.
S + V + (O) + adverb + …
3. Work with a partner.
Example:

Miss Jackson said:

“Can you give Tim this dictionary?”
or “ Please give Tim this dictionary?”
Tim’s mother reported to Tim:

“Miss Jackson asked me to give you
this dictionary.”

or: “ Miss Jackson told me to give you
this dictionary.”

* Commands, requests in reported

speech.

S + asked / told O + to infinitive + …
a. Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her
outside her office.

b. Miss Jackson told me to give you your
report card for this semester.

c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you
with your Spanish pronunciation.

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

- T introduces situation and requirement
(in book).

- T explains the example.

- Ss say the form of indirect advice.
- Ss work in pairs to say the advice in
reported speech.

- T checks and corrects.

week.

4. Work with a partner.
Example:

Miss Jackson said:

“Tim should work harder on his Spanish
pronunciation.”

Tim’s mother reported to Tim:

“Miss Jackson said you should work
harder on your Spanish pronunciation.”
* Advice in reported speech:

S1 + said + S2 + should + infinitive +...
a. Miss Jackson said you should spend
more time on Spanish pronunciation.
b. Miss Jackson said you should practice
speaking Spanish every day.

c. Miss Jackson said you should listen to
Spanish conversations on TV.

d, e at home.
E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.

- Do exercise 7 on page 36 in workbook.
+ T introduces the situation in book.
+ T explains the example:

a. Ba said Khanh should change the way he learn English.
- Prepare Unit 6: Read the dialogue; find new words with their meanings.

Week 11
Period 32

Preparing date: 31 /10/2011 Teaching date: 03 /11/ 2011

unit 6: the young pioneers club
Lesson 1: Getting Started + Listen and Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the dialogue between Nga
and the secretary of the young pioneer club.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape, picture

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- T hangs the picture on the board

- gets Ss to look at the pictures and asks Ss
some quetions:

+ What are the people in the picture
doing?

+ Who often do these activities?

- elicits the words “the Ho Chi Minh Young
Pioneer and Youth Organization or The
Y&Y”

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going
to learn Unit 6 about the Y&Y activities

I/ Getting started
Brainstorming

helping blind
people

*Answer:

- helping elder people

- helping handicapped children

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- asks Ss to identify the activities that the
Y&Y participate in, check the boxes in the
textbook and add more activities to the list
- gets feedback and corrects

II/ Listen and read

- T introduces situation of the dialogue.

- Ss look at the dialogue and listen to tape.
- T elicits some new words.

translation
realia
translation

situation
mime
example

Checking: Rub out and Remember

- sets the scene: Nga wants to take part in
some activities for this summer. Now you
are going to listen to the conversation
between Nga and the secretary of the Y&Y
and answer the questions:

1. What is Nga’s full name?
2. What are her hobbies?

- lets Ss listen to the tape and answer the
pre-questions

- gets feedback and corrects
- T introduces model sentences.
+ What is form of verb after “like”?
+ What verbs are used as “like”?

- Ss read other sentences which use the
form in the dialogue.

- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- Ask some pairs to read the dialogue aloud.
- T listens and corrects.

- T introduces the exercise.

- Ss read the dialogue again and complete
the details.

- Ask Ss to complete the details on the
board.

- T checks and corrects.
- T asks Ss some questions.
a. When was she born?

b. What’s her address? / Where does she
live?

c. Does she have telephone number?
d. What are her hobbies?

- cleaning up the beaches
- planting green trees.

- cleaning up streets, river banks and lakes.
- collecting and empty garbage

….

II/ Listen and read

* Vocabulary

enroll (v) : đăng ký vào học
application form (n): mẫu đơn

(to) fill out : ®iỊn vµo
hobby (n) : së thÝch
sign (v) : ký

outdoor activity (n) :hoạt động ngoài trời

* Answer key

1.Her full name is Pham Mai Nga
2.Drawing, outdoor activities and acting
- gets Ss to listen to the tape again

*Grammar

I like drawing, outdoor activities.
V_ing

Form: like/love/ enjoy/ hate … + V_ing

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

2. Complete Nga’s details.

Name: Pham Mai Nga
Date of birth: April 22, 1989
Sex: female

Home address: 5 Tran Phu Street
Phone number: No

Interests: drawing, outdoor activities,
acting

3. Answer teacher’s questions
a. She was born on April 22, 1989.
b. She lives at Tran Phu Street.
c. No, she doesn’t.

d. She likes drawing, outdoor activities
and acting.

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Read the dialogue again. Prepare part: Speak + Language focus 3
- Do exercise 6 on page 42,43 in workbook.

T explains requirement.

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Week 12

Period 33

Preparing date: 4 /11/2011 Teaching date: 07 /11/ 2011
unit 6: the young pioneers club

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask for favor and respond to
favor and offer assistance and respond.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Chatting

- Ask Ss to tell their stories about what they helped someone and someone helped them.
- T asks some Ss.

- T listens and corrects their pronunciation and grammar.
 II/ New lesson

1. Presentation

- T explains the word “favor”.

- When do you ask for favor? ( need some
help)

- T introduces the phrases in the box to ask
for and respond to favor.

- Ss read the phrases.

- T introduces the dialogue.

+ T sets the scene: Mrs Ngoc is carrying a
heavy bag, but she has hurt her arm. So she
needs some help.

- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- One pair read aloud.

- T introduces and guides Ss about how to
offer and respond to assistance.

- Ss read the example dialogue.
2. Practice

- T introduces and guides the situations in
book.

- Ask one pair to do a model dialogue before
the class.

- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T asks some pairs to demonstrate their
dialogues aloud before the class.

- T listens and checks.
3. Production

- T introduces and guides Ss to do the
exercise 3.

- Ss work in pair.

- T checks and corrects.

I/ Speak

1. How to ask for and respond to 
favor and offer and respond to 
assistance.

- Boxes in book.
2. Practice
Example:
(1) Tourist:

You: Do you need any help?
Tourist: Yes. That’s very kind of
you.

Can you show me the way to
the

police station? I’ve lost
money.

You: Sure. Turn left here. Go
straight to

the end of the road. You’ll see
it

on your right.

Tourist: Thank you very much.
(2)

Neighbor: Could you help me,
please.

You: Certainly. How can I help you?
N: Can you help me tidy the yard?
Y: No problem. I’ll help you.
N: Thank you very much. That’s
very

kind of you.
* Language focus 3.

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

- Ask Ss to practice the dialogues in pairs.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.

* Pre- listening

- Pre-teach vocabulary

- sets the scene: Today you are going to listen
to an English song. This is a song for chidren.
- asks Ss to guess and fill in the missing
words

- gets feedback and writes some guesses on
the board

*While- listening

- lets students listen to the tape twice and
check their predictions.

- gets feedback

- asks Ss to listen again to correct their
answers

- gives feedback and corrects
6. Post- listening

- gets Ss to practice singing the song

- calls on some Ss to sing the song before the
class

practice them.

A: Can you buy a ticket for me?
B: Can you take me across the road?
C: Could you help me with this
math

problem?

D: Can you water the flowers in the
garden?

II. Listen

Vocabulary

- to unite (translation): đoàn
kết, hợp nhÊt

- to hold hands (mime): n¾m
tay

- to shout out (example): hô to,
kêu lên

- to make a stand (explanation):
đứng lên 1. Open prediction

Answer key

1. unite 8. world
2. peace 9. show
3. right 10. place
4. love 11. out
5. north 12. stand
6. south 13. world
7. of

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the phrases in the boxes.

- Do the exercise 1 on page 38,39 in workbook.

Week 12

Period 34

Preparing date: 6 /11/2011 Teaching date: 09 /11/ 2011

unit 6: the young pioneers club
Lesson 2: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read for details to understand a text
(about Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Shark Attack
Y O U T H

- T draws a shark, steps and the person on the B.
- T gives a clue.

- T asks Ss to guess and say each letters of the words.

II/ New lesson

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

- T presents the new words
(notes: some vocab)

- T asks Ss to repeat vocab inchorus and
individually.

Checking: Rub out and remember

2. While-reading

- - T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 – 6 to
read the text and fill in the missing

information in Ex.1-p.57.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks Ss to read the text again and answer
the questions a) – g) in Ex.2- p.57.

- T requests Some pairs give their answer
before the class.

- T listen to Ss’ answer and corrects.

- T asks Some to write their asnwers on the
B.

- T checks and corrects.

- T requests Ss write their answers in their
exercise book.

3. Post-reading

- T gives some questions.

- Ask Ss to read and discuss in groups.
- Ask Ss in the groups to say their ideas.
- T collects and writes on the board.

? Ss name some social activities of the
Young Pioneers Organization in their
school.

Suggested answers:

- Helping the blind people.
- Helping the handicapped.

- Cleaning the Environment nearby.
- Collecting paper, plastic, glass,
- etc.

*Vocabulary

- encourage (v) => In a soccer match there
are many soccer fans encourage to their
team.

- citizenship (n): quyền công dân

Ex: Everyone has citizenship such as: voting,
going to school, taking care, etc

- establish (v) = found (v), set up (v): thiết
lập, sáng lập

- principle (n) : phương châm, nguyên tắc.
- develop one’s awareness:

Ex: To develop people’s awareness in
protecting the forest, The people grow a lot
of trees every year.

- form one’s personality: hình thành nhân
cách.

Answer keys:
1. Fill in the mising information:
a) Viet Nam.

b) December 1976

c) their public awareness and form their
personality.

d) the guidelines

2. Answer the questions:

a) From 15 to 30 years of age one can join
the Youth Union.

b) The Youth Union was founded on March
26 1931.

c) The complete name of the Youth Union is
“Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union.”
d) - Helping the Handicapped.

- Cleaning the Environment.
- Green Summer Volunteers
Campaign.

- And others similar movements.
e) These activities aim to help the young
develop their public awareness and form
their personality.

f) Ho Chi Minh established the guidelines
for the Vietnamese youth

Matching
1. soft skills

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 4 on page 41 in workbook.

Write sentences, using the present simple and given words.
Example: a. Nga visits her grandparents this weekend.
- Prepare part: Write

Read the lesson before, find new words with their meanings.
Week 12

Period 35

Preparing date: 7 /11/2011 Teaching date: 10 /11/ 2011
unit 6: the young pioneers club

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a letter about a future plan
using “be going to”.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Slap the board

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T elicits some new words.
translation

situation
example
situation
picture
translation

Checking: Rub out and remember
- T introduces situation.

- Ss read the passage and find
information to complete the letter.
- T does model two first parts.

- Ss work individual and then compare
with a partner.

- T checks: Noughts and Crosses

2 3 4

5 6 7

8 9 10

2. While-writing
- T sets the scene.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer

*Vocabulary

community (n) : cộng đồng, dân
recycle (v) : tái chế

natural resource (n) : nguồn tài nguyên
thiên nhiªn

fund (n) : quü

sidewalk (n) : vỉa hè, lề đờng
register (v) : ghi vào sổ, ghi nhớ

I/ Read the passage and complete the 
letter.

Example (0) planning
(1) community
(2) recycling
(3) collect
(4) send
(5) recycling
(6) save
(7) earn

(8) participating
(9) planting
(10)helping

2. Read the dialogue and write a 
letter.

Dear Mom and Dad,

plan (to) participate in program

save

earn environmen

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

the questions:

+ Why does Hoa look happy?
+ What is she going to do in the
environment month?

+ What are they doing to earn money?
- Ask Ss to write the letter individual.
- T goes round to help Ss.

3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- T calls on Ss to write their letters on the
board (each student writes on part).
- T reads and corrects.

I’m very happy/ glad to tell you that I’m
going to join in the YY Green Group
of my school.

The Green Group is holding an

environment month plan. We are going
to clean the banks of the lakes on
weekends. We are going to plan trees
and flowers in the school garden and
water them every afternoon after class.
We are planting young trees and plants
to sell to other schools.

We hope to give more green color to the
city and earn some money for our school
YY. It is very interesting and useful,
isn’t it?

I will tell you more about the group
activities later.

Love,
Hoa
E/Guiding - Homework

- Write the letter in workbook.
- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 7 on page 43 in workbook.

Complete the sentences, with V-ing or to infinitive.
Ex: a. to go

- Prepare: Language focus 2,3,4
Read and do the exercise before.

Week 13

Period 36

Preparing date: 11 /11/2011 Teaching date: 14 /11/ 2011
unit 6: the young pioneers club

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about hobbies/ liking and future
actions using the present simple tense with future meaning; and make and respond to
requests/ offers

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Chatting

- Ask one student to go before the class and introduces himself / herself: name, age,
job, address, family, appearance, character, friends, hobby, plan.

- Other Ss can ask him some questions.

II/ New lesson

Dialogue build (poster)

- Sets the scene: Nam and Mai are

1. The Present Simple : LanguageFocus1:
P60

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

talking to each other. Nam wants to
know about the Y&Y Spring activity
program. This is their conversation

-concept checking

- gives instructions: - runs through
the wordcues

- asks Ss to do the exercise
- gets feedback and corrects

- sets the scene: Look at the table.
These are activities that Ba and Lan
like and don’t like

- Explain and concept check model
sentences

- gives instructions: work with a
partner. Look at the table and talk
about our friends’ hobbies

- runs through the table

- asks students to do the exercise
- calls on some pairs to practice
before the class

- gives feedback and corrects
- gives instructions for L.F 2b
- gives an example: in the book
- asks students to do the exercise
- calls on Ss to practice before the
class

- gives feedback and corrects

- explains some about may/ can/
could used to make and respond to 
requests/ offers

- gives instructions

- runs through the expressions

- T introduces and guides Ss to do the
exercise 3.

- Ss work in pair.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to practice the dialogues in
pairs.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.

garbage?

Mai: On January 9

Nam: Where do they collect and empty
garbage?

Mai: At Dong Xuan Market

Nam: What time do they start and finish
work?

Mai: They start at 8 am and finish and
finish at 5 pm

Form : the Present Simple

Use: to talk about certain future actions
* Note:

The present simple tense also express a plan,
time table in the future.

2. Gerunds:

*Model sentences

S1: Ba loves playing soccer, but he doesn’t
like washing up

S2: Lan doesn’t like playing soccer, and she
doesn’t like washing up, either.

Concept check

Form: S + love/ like/ hate + V-ing...
S + don’t/ doesn’t like + V-ing
Use: to talk about hobbies/ liking

Language Focus 2-a P 61:work with a
partner. Ask and answer questions about
Y&Y Spring activity program

Ex: (the same model sentences)

* Language Focus 2-b P61: Copy the table
in your exercise book. Then complete it with
the information about you. Next ask and
answer the questions with your partner

Example:

S1: Do you like playing soccer?
S2: No. I hate it. What about you?
S1: Yes. I love playing soccer.

3. Modals may/ can/ could: Language 
Focus 3: P 61-62

a. Complete the dialogue. Then practice 
them.

A: Can you buy a ticket for me?
B: Can you take me across the road?
C: Could you help me with this math
problem?

D: Can you water the flowers in the
garden?

b. Complete the dialogue. Then practice 
them.

A1: Can/ May I
A2: Do you need
B: me help you.
A3: very kind
E/ Guiding - Homework

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

- Revise vocabulary and structures in Units: 4,5,6.
- Do exercise 2 on page 39 in workbook.

Use present simple to express plans and timetable.
Example: a. starts ... finishes

Week 13

Period 37

Preparing date: 13 /11/2011 Teaching date: 16 /11/ 2011
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will revise and conclude the main knowledge of
Units 4, 5 and 6.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, workbook, extra-board
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

Pelmanism

good soft bad fast hard careful quick

well softly badly fast hard carefully quickly

II/ New lesson

I. Language skills (20’ )
1. Listening

- runs through all the listening tasks in Units 4-6
+ Listening to a folktale

+ Listening to a conversation about someone’s study to complete a report card
+ Listening to an English song

- gives instructions about how to do these tasks
- says some notes for this item

2. Reading

- runs through all the reading texts in Units 4-6
+ a folktale

+ a text about ways of learning new words
+ a text about organizations for boys and girls

- explains some more about how to do each type of reading tasks
3. Writing

- goes through all the writing tasks in Units 4-6
+ writing a short story

+ writing an informal letter to talk about your study
+ writing a letter to talk about Y&Y activities

- explains some more about how to do each type of writing tasks
4. Speaking

- goes through all the speaking tasks in Units 4-6
+ talking about past habits and events
+ speaking about your study

+ making and responding to requests and offers
- says some notes about these speaking tasks

II. Grammar (24’ )

- explains some more about some grammar items in Units 4-6
+ The Past Simple

+ Used to

+ Prepositions of time
+ Adverbs of manner

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

+ The Present Simple with future meaning
+ Gerunds

Exercises: (workbook)

Ex6 (P30), Ex7 (P36), Ex2(P39-40), Ex6 (P42-43)
- gives instructions on how to do these exercises

- asks students to do the exercises
- asks students to call out the answers
- gives feedback and corrects

III. Homework (1’)

- write all the exercises in your exercise book
- revise for the text

+ Prepare: English test ( 2
E/ Guiding Homework

- Revise knowledge of the units 4, 5 and 6 for test 45’.
- Redo the exercises in textbook and workbook.

Week 13

Period 38

Preparing date : 14/11/2010 Teaching date: 17/11/2010
test 45’

A. Objectives:

- To check students’ result of study in Units 1-3
B. Matrix

Tên chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Cấp độ thấpVận dụngCấp độ cao Cộng

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL

Listening

Listen to a short
recording about

personal
information then

fill in the form

Listen to a short
recording about

personal
information then

fill in the form

Sè c©u hái 4 4

Sè ®iĨm 2 2 (20%)

Phonetics Pronunciation ofnew words in
Units 4-6

Số câu hỏi 5 5

Số điểm 1 1(10%)

Language

Focus time/ advebs ofPrepositions of
manner

Present tense with
future meaning,

used to

Command,request
advice in reported

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

Số câu hỏi 2 6 2 10

Số điểm 0.5 1.5 0.5 2.5 (25%)

Reading Read a passage about personal information and answer the questions

Số câu hỏi 4 1 5

Số điểm 2 0.5 2.5 (25%)

Writing Rewrite sentences into reported

speech

Sè c©u hái 5 5

Số điểm 2.5 2.5 (25%)

Tổng số câu
Tổng số diểm
Tỷ lệ

11 câu
3.5 điểm

35 %

10 câu
3 điểm
30 %

8 câu
3.5 điểm

35 %

Số câu:
29
Điểm: 10

C. Content

Question1: Listen then complete the form below. (2ps)

Full name:(1) ...

Class:(2) ...

Date of birth:(3) ...

Hobbies:(4) ...
...

I - Choose the word that has the underlined letter pronounced differently from the 
others(1pt) .

1 . A. promise B. revise C . stick D .visit

2 . A. enroll B. help C . pencil D. spend

3 . A. how B. highlight C . hour D. hot

4 . A. young B. lunch C . enough D. humor

5. A . need B. read C. really D.

teach

Your answers : 1………….; 2…………..; 3…………..; 4………
Question3: Circle the best option to complete each sentence. (2,5ps)
1. I used to ... fishing when I was a young boy.

a. going b. go c. went d. to go

2. I was born...October 15, 1994.

a. in b. at c. under d. on

3. Miss Jackson asked me...you this dictionary.

a. give b. giving c. to give d. to giving

4. Could you ...me a favor?

a. do b. give c. make d. bring

5. The prince immediately fell...love with Little Pea.

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

6. Thanh likes...to music very much.

a. listened b. listen c. listening d. listens

7. In the past, people used to ... in small houses.

a live b. lived c. living d. had

8. Mr. Nam ...to bring this book to you.

a. told to me b. said c. said me d. told me

9. My brother usually helps me... my homework.

a. with b. about c. of d. at

10. Lan always gets good grades because she studies...

a. good b. goodly c. hardly d. hard

IV-Read the passage and answer the questions.(2pts)

In the first year of lower secondary school. Nga had some difficulties in learning
English.Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar

was worse.She did not know how to improve them .

One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside
the classroom .She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her
pronunciation with a cassette. She also told her how to use an English-English
dictionary to improve her English grammar. Now her English is better and she has just
won a prize in the English Speaking contest.

*Questions:

1. What difficulties did Nga have in the first year of lower secondary school?
2. Did she know how to improve her English?

3.Who helped her improve her English?

4. How did she help her to improve her English grammar?
5. How is her English now?

V- Rewrite the following sentences into reported speech (2pts).
1. “ Eat more fruits and vegetables.” The doctor said to me.

- The doctor told me………

2. “ Can you open the door, Nam” Hoa said.

- Hoa asked………

3. “can you turn down the radio,please?” my father said to me.

-My father asked me………

4. “you should practice speaking English everyday”the teacher said to Nam.

- The teacher said ………
5. “ please, give Hoa this book” Nam asked me.

- Nam asked me………

D/ Answer

The Listening text

(The teacher reads the text twice)

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

School. I’m in class 8C. I’m good at English. I was born on October 4th, 1997. My
hobbies are watching TV and studying English.

Answer key
Question I: (2p)

1. Nguyen Thu Huong
2. 8 C

3. October 4th, 1997

4. watching TV and studying English
Question 2: 5 x 0,2=1,0 mark

1 2 3 4
5
B A C D

C
Question 3: 10 x 0.25 = 2.5p

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b d c a b c a d a d

Question 4: 5 x 0.4 = 2.5p

1- In the first year of lower secondary school , Nga had some difficulties in learning
english .

2- No, she did not know how to improve her English.
3- Her teacher of English helped her improve her English.

4- She told her how to use an English – English dictionary to improve her Enlish
grammar.

5- Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking
Contest.

Question 5: 5 x 0.5 = 2.5p

1 – The doctor told me to eat more fruits and vegetables.
2 – Hoa asked Nam to open the door.

3 – My father asked me to turn down the radio.

4 – The teacher said that Nam should practice speaking English everyday.

5 – Nam asked me to give Hoa that book.

E. Homework
- Redo the test

Week 14

Period 39

Preparing date : 18/11/2011 Teaching date: 21/11/2011
correcting the test

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to find out what they learn well as what they
didn't learn well. Ddepend on the result of the written test, Ss will continue their

methods and skills to revise the old knowledge and remember it. they able to lern new
knowledge better.

B/ Language content:

- The skills of listening, reading, writing

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

D/ Material: papers
E. Correcting the test
1. Good aspect:
2. Bad aspect :

+ Ss get good marks: Hïng,Ng.HuyÒn, Nhanh, K.Trang, Xuân,T.Yến,Oanh8c,Phúc

+ Ss get bad marks :Tuấn,Đức 8a, Sơn,Ngọc8b, X.Anh, Đạt,Liêm, Thanh, Vang

3. Comment mistakes Correcting/ methods

3.1 Listening
3.2 Reading

3.3 Language focus

3.4 Writing

*Listening : be more careful
*Reading :2. She is tall and thin
not: I’m tall and thin and have long
black hair

3. Her best friends are Lan and Nga.
Not : My best friends are Lan and Nga
5,6 are Yes/No-questions not
Wh-questions.

8A: 2. Yes, he did.

4. Thomas Watson was Bell’s assistant
(base on sentence: Thomas watson, Bell's
assistant...)

*Language focus
have to + infinitive
seem + Adjective

enough + to infinitive
between ... and ...

* Writing: - tense: Presenr simple tense
- Preposisions and articles

4. Point and key
* Answer key
Question I: (2p)

5. Nguyen Thu Huong
6. 8 C

7. October 4th, 1997

8. watching TV and studying English

Question 2: 5 x 0,2=1,0 mark

1 2 3 4 5
B A C D C

Question 3: 10 x 0.25 = 2.5p

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b d c a b c a d a d

Question 4: 5 x 0.4 = 2.5p

1- In the first year of lower secondary school , Nga had some difficulties in learning
english .

2- No, she did not know how to improve her English.
3- Her teacher of English helped her improve her English.

4- She told her how to use an English – English dictionary to improve her Enlish
grammar.

5- Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking
Contest.

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

1 – The doctor told me to eat more fruits and vegetables.
2 – Hoa asked Nam to open the door.

3 – My father asked me to turn down the radio.

4 – The teacher said that Nam should practice speaking English everyday.
5 – Nam asked me to give Hoa that book.

F. Homework

- Prepare Unit 4: Getting started + Listen and read.

Read the lesson before, find new words with their meanings.

Week 14

Period 40

Preparing date : 20/11/2011 Teaching date: 23/11/2011
unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about Na’s new
neighbor.

*Voc: neighborhood, close by, serve, pancake, tasty
* Gram: have/has + PII : Present Perfect tense
for : a period of time

since: a point of time
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape, 
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- T introduces the pictures and
requirements.

- Ss read the words and match.

- Ss work individual, and compare with a
partner.

- T calls on 2 Ss to write their answers on
the board.

- T asks other Ss to read their answers.
- T corrects.

II/ Listen and read

- T elicits some new words
example

here

(to) give some food and drink
explanation

delicious
Checking: What and Where

- T introduces the model sentences and
form of a new tense.

- Ss read and copy.

I/ Getting started

Match the names with pictures.
a. grocery store

b. stadium

c. wet market
d. drugstore
e. hairdresser’s
f. swimming-pool
II/ Listen and read
* Vocabulary

neighborhood (n) : hµng xãm
close by (adv) : ë gÇn
serve (v) : phơc vơ
pancake (n) : bánh bột mì
tasty (adj) : ngon

* Grammar

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

- sets the scene: Nam and Na are talking
to each other. Na is new to the
neighborhood and she wants to know
something about the neighborhood.
- T gives Ss two questions.

- Ss look at book and listen to tape two
times.

- Ask Ss to answer the questions
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.
- Ss read the dialogue again and
complete the sentences.

- Ss work individually.
- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and correct.
III. Production

- gives instructions: make sentences
using the Present Perfect tense with
since/ for

- asks students to do the exercise
- asks students to call out the answers
- gives feedback and corrects

for : a period of time
since: a point of time

1. Comprehension questions
a/ How long has Nam lived in that
neighborhood?

b/ Where does Na want to go out?
Answer:

a. He has lived there for ten years.
b. She wants to go to a restaurant.

2. Practice the dialogue with a partner.
3. Complete the sentences

a. new
b. last week
c. tired
d. restaurant
e. Hue
f. pancake

* Word cue Drill: (poster)

1. The Robinsons/ live/ Ha Noi/
2001

2. They / be/ on holiday/ last week
3. They / be/ Nha Trang/ 2 days
4. They/ be/ Hue/ 3 days

They / be/ Ho Chi Minh City/ yesterday

E/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Read the dialogue again.

- Do exercise 4 on page 45 in workbook.
Ex: a. I live in Tien Dong village.
- Prepare: Speak and Listen

Read and do the exercises before.

Week 14

Period 41

Preparing date : 21/11/2011 Teaching date: 24/11/2011

unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about Na’s new neighbor.
* Voc: airmail ,surface mail, weigh, weight, charge, parcel, a fan ,photo exhibition ,take a
photograph, performance

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, tape,

C/Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up : Brainstorming

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

post office

go to the movies

II/ New lesson

1. Presentation

- T presents some new words.
explanation
explanation

picture
example
translation

picture
example
translation
mime
explanation
Checking by what and where

- T sets the scene: Mrs. Kim wants to send a
parcel to Quy Nhon, so she has to go to the
post office.

- T gives some questions.
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- One pair read it aloud.

- Ask Ss to answer the questions.
- T corrects.

2. Practice

- T explains the words and phrases in the
boxes.

- T guides Ss to make dialogues by using
mapped dialogue.

- T does model with a good student.

I/ Speak

*Vocabulary

airmail (n) : th gửi bằng đờng hàng
không

surface mail (n) : th gửi bằng đờng bộ/
thuỷ , th thờng
weigh (v) : cân nặng

weight (n) : träng lỵng
charge (n) : giá cả, chi phí
parcel (n) : bu kiÖn

a fan : 1 ngêi h©m mé

photo exhibition (n): triĨn l·m ¶nh

to take a photograph : chơp ¶nh
performance=show (n):bi tr×nh chiÕu

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

* Questions

a. Does Mrs. Kim send the parcel airmail or
surface mail? Why?

b. What’s the weight of the parcel?
c. How much does she pay?

Answer:

a. She sends the parcel surface mail because
it is much cheaper.

b. It’s five kilograms.
c. She pays 19,200 dong.
2. Make similar dialogue

Mapped dialogue
Clerk You

neighborhoo
d

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

- Ss work in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects.
Example exchange

S1: Can I help you?

S2: I want to send this letter to Kon Tum.
S1: Do you want to send it airmail or
surface mail?

S2: Surface mail, please. How much is it?
S1: I’ll weigh it. It’s 20 grams. That’s 800
dong.

S2: Here you are.
S1: Thank you.

S2: You are welcome.

3. Production

- Ask Ss to write one of four dialogues in
notebook.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- One student writes on the board.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Pre-listening

- T sets the scene: Na is new in the

neighborhood. She is talking to Nam about
what she’s going to do on the weekend.

- T introduces the requirement.

- Ss read the advertisements and phrases.
- Ss predict.

2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape and check their prediction.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-listening

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T checks and corrects

Can I help you? I want to send
this ….. to…..
Do you want to

send it …….
or ………..?

……mail, please.
How much ……?
I’ll weigh it.

It’s …. grams/
kilograms.

That’s … dong.

Here you are.
Thank you. Bye.

Bye.

3. Writing

II/ Listen

1. Fill the blanks in advertisement

a. Prediction
b. Listening
(2) Town Ground

(3) English Speaking Contest
(4) Culture House

2. Listen again and check for True, False 
or No Information.

a. T d. T b. F
e. T c. F f. N I

3. Retell the dialogue

Ex: Na is new in the neighborhood. She
doesn’t know what to do on the weekend

E/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 5 on page 46 in workbook.

Write verbs in past simple or present perfect tense.
Ex: a. started b. have known

Week 15

Period 42

Preparing date : 25/11/2011 Teaching date: 28/11/2011

unit 7: My neighborhood
Lesson 3: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the passage about a
new shopping mall.

*Voc: mall, convenient, comfort, notice, product, resident, selection, discount,
air-conditioned

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up: Matching

A B

1. shop a. sự thay đổi
2. roof b. giá rẻ

3. customer c. thơng mại, buôn bán
4. owner d. hàng hoá

5. change (n) e. cöa hµng
6. business f. khách hàng
7. goods g. mái nhà
8. cheap price h. ngêi chñ
9. discuss (v) i. th¶o luËn
Key: 1- e, 2- g, 3- f, 4- h, 5- a, 6- c, 7- d, 8- b, 9- i

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
explanation

translation
comfortable (adj)

translation
produce (v)

example

translation

situation
translation
- T sets the scene: In Nam’s

neighborhood there is a new shopping
mall.

- Ss read the statements and predict True
or False.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and the advertisement
to check their prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to correct false sentences.

- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out
answers. Ss work in pairs. (5’)

- T checks: Lucky numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6
d LK a b LK c

3. Post-reading

- Ask Ss to discuss the market or a big

* Vocabulary

mall (n) : khu thơng mại
convenient (adj) : thuËn tiÖn
comfort (n) : sự thoải mái
notice (v) : lu ý, lu t©m
product (n) : s¶n phÈm
resident (n) : c d©n

selection (n) : sù chän lùa
discount (n) : sự giảm giá

air-conditioned (adj) : cú iu ho nhiệt
độ

1. True or False?
* Prediction
* Reading

a. F b. F c. F d. T e. T
* Correction

a. The mall is open daily.

b. There are 50 stores in the mall.

c. Some people are not pleased about the
new mall.

2. Answer

a. It is different from the present
shopping area. All the shops are under
one roof, so customers won’t notice the
weather.

b. There are 50 air-conditioned specialty
stores, 4 movie theaters, 10 restaurants
and a children play area.

c. They think the mall will take their
business.

d. The stores in the mall will offer a
wider selection of products; some goods
are at lower prices.

3. Discussion
Example:

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68>

store in your neighborhood.
- Ss work in 4 groups.
- T checks and corrects.

E/ Guiding – Homework

Learn by heart the new words.
- Do exercise 3 on page 44, 45.

Complete the dialogues.
Example: in book

a. Nam: Where do you live? (Present Simple)

How long have you live there? (Present Perfect)
- Prepare: Write

Read the lesson before.
Week 15

Period 43

Preparing date : 27/11/2011 Teaching date: 30/11/2011
unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a notice.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up:

Correct exercise 3 on page 44, 45 in workbook.

- T calls on some pairs to read the completed dialogues aloud.
- Ask other Ss to correct.

b. do … have you had c. has he worked …. for

d. Do … do … e. Do you … How long have you
have you know him …For lived here … For

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T sets the scene: The residents and
store owners on Tran Phu Street are
going to hold a meeting to discuss the
effects of the new mall.

- Ss read the notice and answer the
questions.

- T listens and corrects.
- T gives Ss some notes.
- Ss copy.

2. While-writing

- Ask Ss to read the paragraph and find:
owner, reason, place, time, person to
contact.

- Ss write individual.

1.Read the community notice 
*Comprehension questions
a. Who hold the meeting?
b. Why do they hold?

c. Where and when will they hold the
meeting? What time?

d. Who can people contact?
* Note: A notice

- Grammar: Don’t write full sentences.
- Content: owner, reason, date, time,
place, who to contact.
2. Write a notice

</div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-writing

- T introduces and gives some situations.
- Ss work in groups of 3 or 4.

- T checks and corrects.

Date: November 15

Time: 7.30 pm to 10.00 pm
Place: Hall 204, Building G

Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of
class 8H at the above address for more
information.

3. Write one or two notices about your
class meeting or your Sports Club 
meeting.

Situation: Class meeting
- To discuss mini-project

- To hold a picture drawing contest
- To hold a singing contest

E/ Guiding – Homework

- Continue to write a notice.

- Do exercise 1 on page 44 in workbook.
Example:

Infinitive Past Participle
work worked

- Prepare: Language focus

Read and do the exercises before.

Week 15

Period 44

Preparing date : 28/12/2011 Teaching date: 01/12/2011
unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use Present Perfect tense and
make comparison by using adjectives: like, the same as, different from, …

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

Pelmanism
Infinitive – Past Participle

be go eat attend see do write work collect

been gone eaten attended seen done written worked collected

II/ New lesson

- T introduces the exercise.

- Ss read each pair of verbs in warm up.
- T listens and corrects

- T introduces the exercise.

- Ss say the use of “for” and “since”.
- Ss complete and then compare with a
partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T sets the scene: Na is new in Nam’s
neighborhood. They are talking to each
other.

- What is the tense of the verbs?
- What is its form?

- T says requirement and example.
- Ss work individual, then compare with
a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T explains requirement.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- T shows the pictures and explains the
example.

- Ss look at the picture.

- Ss read the sentences and given words.
- Ss read and complete each sentences.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Match each verb with its participle
be – been, do - did

go – gone, write – written
eat – eaten, work - worked
live – lived, collect -

collected

attend – attended, see –seen
2. Complete the expressions
for five minutes

since January
since 1990

since the summer
for three hours
for ten weeks
since Friday
for 20 years.

3. Complete the sentences.
* Model sentences

Na: How long have you lived here?
Nam: I have lived here for ten years.
* Present Perfect tense

- Form: have/ has + PII

- Use: to talk about what started in the
past and continued up to the present.
b. have not (haven’t ) eaten

c. haven’t seen
d. have attended
e. has worked
f. has collected

4. Complete the conversation.
(1) have been (5) want
(2) hope (6) looks

(3) have … lived (7) Have … been

(4) Is (8) have seen
5. Complete the sentences

Example:

a. The magazine is not as/so large as the
newspaper.

b. Lipton tea is different from Dilmah
tea.

c. different from / not as cheap as
d. the same as

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71>

- Ss say the structures.
- Ss copy in notebook.

g. as long as

h. not as modern as
i. not as cheap as
* Form:

+ (not) as … as: (không) bằng
+ different from: khác

+ the same as : gièng

E/ Guiding – Homework

- Do the exercises again.

- Prepare Unit 8: Getting started + Listen and read.

Read the lesson before; find new words with their meanings.
Week 16

Period 45

Preparing date : 02/12/2011 Teaching date: 05/12/2011
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the city life and the
country life.

*Voc: peaceful, permanently, facility, accessible

* Gram: Present Progressive : used to express the change
B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, picture
C/Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures

I/Warm up
- T asks:

+ Where do you live?

+ Have you ever been to city?

+ Are there many differences between
them?

T: Now make a list of the differences
between the countryside and the city
- Ss work in pairs, Ss can use given
words in book.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the lesson: Today you are
going to listen and read about the
differences between the city and the
countryside

II/ Listen and read

- T hangs the picture on the board and
introduces the dialogue between Hoa
and Na.

- T gives 2 questions.

- Ss look at book, listen to tape and
answer the questions.

- T listens and corrects.
- T elicits some new words.

situation
translation

example
(to) be able to use

I/ Getting started

The differences between the country and
the city.

City
noisy,pollution
noisy, tall
buildings, kinds
of goods,

entertainments,
traffic jam …

Countryside
quiet,fresh air
beautiful views,
fresh air,

friendly, fresh
foods ….

II/ Listen and read

* Comprehension questions
- Where does Hoa prefer to live?
- What about Na?

* Vocabulary

peaceful (adj) : bình yên

</div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Check: What and Where

- T introduces model sentences.
- What do they mean?

- What is tense of the verbs?

- When is the present progressive tense
also used?

- Ss look at book and read the dialogue
in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T asks some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the questions.

- T explains difficult questions if
necessary.

- Ss ask and answer the questions in
pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to work in groups of 3,4 to say
about advantages of country life.

- T collects and writes on the board.

* Model sentences:

- Things are changing in the countryside.
- Many remote areas are getting

electricity.

Present Progressive is also used to
express the change.

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

2. Answer the questions

a. Na has been to the countryside.
b. She was there for the weekend/ for

one day.

c. The countryside is peaceful and quiet
and nothing to do.

d. She means that there are no libraries,
no movies, no supermarkets … to go.
e. Many remote areas are getting
electricity. People can now have things
like refrigerators, TVs and medical
facilities are more accessible.

3. Discussion

Say advantages of life in the countryside.

E/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 2 on page 49 in workbook.

Complete the sentences with the given verbs in the present progressive.
Ex: a. is leaving

- Prepare part: Speak + Listen

Read the lesson before and find new words with their meanings.

Week 16

Period 46

Preparing date : 04/12/2011 Teaching date: 07/12/2011
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to practice speaking about the
changes of a place and complete the dialogue by listening.

* Gram: be + getting / becoming + adj
B/ Teaching aids:

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

I/ Warm up Lucky numbers
Exercise 2 on page 49

- Divide the class into 2 teams.
- Ss read completed dialogues.

1d, 2lk, 3f, 4b, 5e, 6lk, 7c, 8lk
* Key:

b. are studying e. is flying
c. is moving f. am seeing
d. am fishing

II/ New lesson
1. Presentation

- T hangs the pictures and introduces
example in book.

+ What does it mean?

+ What tense of the verb is?
+ What is it used to express?
2. Practice

- T says the requirement.
- Ss read the given words.

- Ss find pairs of noun and adjectives.
- T writes on the board.

- T asks one S to make an example.
- Ss work in pairs. Each student makes a
sentence.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- Ask Ss to say their sentences.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Production

- T introduces the exercise and does
example.

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T asks to say their ideas.

- T checks and corrects.
II/ Listen

1. Pre-listening

- T sets the scene: Aunt Hang is talking
to Lan on the phone. She is coming to
visit Lan in Hanoi.

- Ss read the dialogue and guess missing
words.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape and check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.

I/ Speak

* Model sentences

- The town is becoming busier.
is getting

* Form:

be + getting / becoming + adj

* Use:

It is used to describe changes with “get”
and “become”.

1. Talk about the changes of the town.
Ex:

- traffic busy
sky cloudy
houses tall
city beautiful
tress green trees
streets noisy, busy and
beautiful

goods expensive
air, water dirty
means of transport modern
clothes beautiful
- The traffic is getting busier.

- There are more tall buildings and
houses.

- There are more green trees.

………

2. Talk about the changes in your

hometown.

Ex:

The roads are becoming larger/ more
beautiful.

II/ Listen

Fill in the missing words.
* Prediction

* Listening

(1) that (8) arriving
(2) this ( 9) Thursday
(3) It’s (10) late

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to make similar dialogues.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.
E/ Guiding - Homework

- Do exercise 5 on page 51 in workbook.

Ex: a. are getting/ becoming more important.

- Write 5 sentences about the changes in our school.
- Prepare part: Read

Read the lesson and find new words their meanings.
Week 16
Period 47

Preparing date : 05/12/2011 Teaching date: 08/12/2011
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 3: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the text about one of
the social problems.

*Voc: strain,,typhoon, drough, struggle, migrant, increase, decrease, opportunity
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Matching

1. plentiful a. ph¸ hủ
2. nature b. kÕt qu¶
3. flood c. nhiỊu
4. destroy d. d©n sè

5. population e. tù nhiªn
6. provide f. c¬ së vËt chÊt
7. result g. lò lôt

8. facilities h. cung cÊp
* Key:

1 – c, 2 – e, 3 – g, 4 – a, 5 – d, 6 – h, 7 – b, 8 – f.
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
translation

big storm
>< flood
translation
explanation

situation
>< increase

= chance
Checking: What and Where

- T asks Ss to think of the difficulties of
farmers’ life.

- Ss say and T writes on the board.

* Vocabulary

strain (n) : sự quá tải
typhoon (n) : trận bão lớn
drought (n) : hạn hán
struggle (n) : sự đấu tranh
migrant (n) : dân di c
increase (v) : tăng lên
decrease (v) : giảm xuống
opportunity (n) : cơ hội
* Difficulties of farmer s life’

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

- T introduces the text and asks Ss to
guess the answer to the question.
2. While-reading

- Ss read the text individual to answer
the question.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement and
guides Ss to do. T does model part 1.
- Ss read the text again and find suitable
words to complete.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
Noughts and Crosses

2 3 4

5 6 7

8 9 10

- T introduces, guides and does model
part a.

- Ss read the text again and find suitable
words.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-reading

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.

- T calls groups to say their ideas.
- T collects and writes on the board.

- What do many farmers do to solve their
problems?

1. Complete the summary
Example: (1) leaving

Key:

(2) home (7) schools
(3) city (8) hospital
(4) rural (9) problem
(5) city (10) world
(6) problems

2. Find the words in the passage that 
means:

a. rural d. strain
b. plentiful e. tragedy
c. increase f. urban
3. Discussion

If you were a Minister, what would you
do for farmers?

Ex:

- build schools, hospitals, …
- provide clean water

- ………

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart all new words.

- Do exercise 4 on page 51 in workbook.
Ex: a. visits …….. once a year.

- Prepare Part: Write

Revise the form of a letter.

Week 17

Period 48

Preparing date : 09/12/2011 Teaching date: 12/12/2011
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write letters to their friends about
their neighborhood.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- Do you often write letters?
- How often do you write?
- Who do you write to?

- What do you often write about?

II/ New lesson

1. Pre-writing

- Ask Ss to read the outline in exercise 1
and reorder.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the questions and
answer them.

- Ss work individual.

- T asks some Ss to answer.

- Ask Ss can give some ideas, not real in
their village.

2. While-writing

- Ask Ss to write individual.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T writes down Ss’ typical mistakes.

3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T asks some Ss to read their writings
aloud.

1. Re-order
A. Heading

- writer’s address
- date

B. Opening

C. Body of the letter
D. Closing

2. Answer the questions
Example:

1. I live in a small village/ …

2. My house is very nice/ beautiful/ …
3. From my bedroom window, I can see
a large paddy field/ ….

4. It’s very far from/ near / next to/… my
house.

5. I get to school by bike/ …

6. There are some stores, food stalls, a
stadium, a small market, ….

7. I like the stadium best.

8. Because I often play soccer with my
friends there.

3. Write a letter.
Ex:

Tien Dong village
December 8th , 2008 
Dear Phuong,

Thank you for your letter. I am telling
you about the place where I live. I live in

… My family has a small/ large house
with … bedrooms …and a garden. I and
my sister have a bedroom. From the
bedroom window, I can see a green
paddy field with cows and buffaloes
grazing there. I live don’t near my
school so I go to school by bike. In my
neighborhood there are some stores, a
small market, a stadium. I like the

stadium best because I often play soccer

with my friends in the afternoon. Do you
have a stadium like that in your

neighborhood? Is there any interesting in
the place where you live? Write to me.
I’d like to say goodbye now. I’m
looking forwards to hearing from you
soon.

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

- T listens and corrects. Hoa

4. Correction

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Ask Ss to write the letter again after correction.
- Do exercises of Language focus before.

Revise structure of “get” and “become” in the Present Progressive tense.
Revise comparative and superlative.

Week 17

Period 49

Preparing date: 11 -12 - 2011 Teaching date: 14 -12– 2011
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use present progressive to show
changes with “get” and “become” to talk about the future and comparative and

superlative adjectives.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming
Group 1 Group 2

II/ New lesson

- T introduces the dialogues.
- Ss read in pairs.

- Two pairs read them aloud.

- T guides Ss to use the information in
the table to replace to make similar
dialogues.

- T does model with a good Ss.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- T shows requirement and example.
- One pair read the example.

- Ss work in pairs to complete other
dialogues.

- T goes around and helps Ss.

1. Make similar dialogues
* Note:

- Form: am/ is/are + V-ing

- The present perfect tense is also used to
express the plans in the future.

2. Complete the dialogues. Use the 
verbs in the present progressive tense.
Example:

a. S1: What are you doing tonight?
S2: I’m playing table tennis.
(1) are doing

(2) am watching

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement and

example.

- Ss read the adjectives and complete the
sentences individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss say form and use of get and become.

- T asks Ss to retell the form and use of
comparative.

- T introduces requirement.

- Ss read the adjectives and given words
and say their meanings.

- Ss make sentences in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks Ss to say again the uses and
forms of the superlative.

- Ss read the advertisement and example.
- Ss make sentences with adjectives.
- T checks and corrects.

(3) am going
(4) am cleaning

(5) am having

3. Complete the sentences
Example:

a. The boys are getting taller.
b. are getting/ becoming weaker
c. is getting dark

d. is becoming cold
e. are getting better
f. is becoming cleaner

* To express changes, we can use:
am/ is/ are + getting/ becoming + adj
4. Make comparisons between the city 
and country.

* Comparative

- Form: short adj _er + than
more + long adj + than
*Key:

- The food in the city is more expensive
than in the country.

- The schools in the country are smaller
than in the city.

……..

5. Compare the house, the villa and the 
apartment.

* Superlative

- Form: the short adj-est
the most + long adj
- Example:

1. The house is more expensive then the
apartment.

2. The apartment is smaller than the
villa.

3. The villa is the oldest home.

……….

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79></div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80></div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

Week 17

Period 50

Preparing date: 12 -12 - 2011 Teaching date: 15 -12– 2011

revision
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge in Unit
1,2 and Unit 3.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, extra-board

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Guessing Game
- T asks one S to describe one of student in class.

Ex: He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. He is wearing …..

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- T guides.

- Ss say the main knowledge of the unit 1.
- T listens, corrects and writes on the board.

- Ss make examples.

- T asks Ss to retell the knowledge of the
unit 2.

- Ask Ss to say the main knowledge of unit
3.

- Ss say reflexive pronouns and their use.
- Ss give example.

- Ss say form and use of modal verbs.
- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss say the use of why question.
- Ss make example.

- T listens, corrects and writes on the board.
- T hangs extra-board.

- Ss read the exercise.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks Ss to read the words in chorus.
- T guides.

- Ask Ss to read the sentences.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
- T introduces and guides.
- Ss work in pairs.

- Ss go to the board and write each
sentence.

- T corrects.

A. Grammar

I. Unit 1

1. Present Simple tense to talk about general
truths.

Form: (+) S + V/V-s/es + …
(-) S + don’t + infinitive ….
(?) Does/ Do + S + infinitive …?
Ex: The sun rises in the East.

2. S +be (+ not) + be + adj + enough +
to-infinitive + …

đủ (khơng đủ ….. để làm gì

Ex: He is not old enough to go to school.

II. Unit 2

1. “be going to” to talk about intention
Form : be going to + infinitive

Ex: I am going to go fishing with my
friends this afternoon.

2. Adverbs of place

outside, inside, there, here, upstairs,
downstairs.

Ex: Some students are outside.
We are upstairs.

III. Unit 3

1. Reflexive pronouns

myself, yourself, yourselves, ourselves,
themselves, herself, himself

Use: to emphasize subject or object
It can be object in the sentence.
Form: S+ V + (O) + reflexive pronoun
Position: It stands at the end of the sentence
or after S or O.

2. Modals

- must/ have to + infinitive : to express
obligation

- ought to + infinitive: to express advice
3. Why… ? Because… .

to ask answer about reason

Ex: Why are you late?

Because my bike broke down.
B. Exercises

Exercise 1:

Choose the words which the underlined part
is different form the others.

1.A. children B. chicken
C. chair D. character
2.A. curly B. shy

C. fly D. sky
3. A. joke B. local
C. blond D. sociable

Exercise 2: Write correct form of verbs
1. My grandparents (visit) ……….. us next
Sunday. Would you like (meet) them?
2. The Moon (go) ….. around the Earth, and
the Earth (move) around the Sun.

3. We are learning to fly. We (be) going to
be a pilot.

* Answer:

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

*Answer:

1. This shirt is not big enough for her son to
wear.

2. Hung is generous and outgoing but thing
I like most is his sense of humor.

3. We are going to a pop concert at the City
Concert tonight.

2. goes …… moves
3. are going to

Exercise 3: Write sentences, using given
words.

1. shirt/ not big/ enough/ her son/ wear.
2. Hung/ generous / outgoing / but / thing / I
/ like/ most / be/ sense/ humor.

3. We/ going/ pop concert/ City Concert
Center/ tonight.

E. Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Make sentences using the structures.
- Revise Unit 3 and Unit 4.

Week 18

Period 51

Preparing date: 16 -12 - 2011 Teaching date: 19 -12– 2011
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge
in Unit 4,5 and Unit 6.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming

Group 1 Group 2
cooking meals

II. New lesson

- Ss say main knowledge of unit 4.
- Ss say form and use of “used to”.

- Ss say prepositions of time and uses.
- T corrects and writes on the board.

- Ss makes example.

- Ss say form, use of past simple tense.
- T corrects and writes on the board.

A. Main knowledge
II. Unit 4

1. used to + infinitive

to express an action which usually
happed in the past but now it stops.
Ex: I used to get up late when I was very
little.

2. Prepositions of time
in: month, year, season
on: date, day of week
at: o’clock

between … and …
after , before : time

Ex: I often get up at six o’clock.
3. Past Simple tense

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

- Ss copy.

- Ss say the main knowledge of unit 5.
- Ss say form of reported sentences.

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy and give example.

- Ss say form and use of adverbs of
manner.

- Ss make examples.

- Ss say main knowledge of unit 6.
- Ss say form and use of gerunds.
- Ss make examples.

- Ss open the book and read the
structures.

- T makes an example dialogue with a
good student.

- Ss make other dialogues.

- T hangs the extra-board on the board.
- Ss read the exercise and write past
form of the verbs.

Key: went, appeared, sat, had, did, came
- Ss read the verbs and their past form in
chorus.

- Ss read the exercise and complete the
sentences.

- T checks and corrects.

Key: 1. at…at 2. on 3. between
4. to…on

-T introduces.
- Ss work in groups

- Get feed back in the game "Lucky
numbers"

1.a 2.LN 3.c

4.b 5.d 6.LN

- T asks Ss to write on the board.
Key:1. This is Hoa’s living room.

2. There is a rug in front of the fireplace.
3. A dog is lying on the rug.

4. There are some pictures on the wall.

- Use: express an action which happened
and finished at definite time in the past.
- Adverbs: yesterday, ago, last …

II. Unit 5

1. Reported speech
a. request, command

S + asked/ told + O + to infinitive + …
Ex: She asked me to sit down.

b. advice

S1+ said + S2 + should + infinitive + …
Ex: He said I should get up early.

2. Adverbs of manner.
Form: adj + ly = adv

Use: bổ nghĩa cho động từ thờng.
S + V + (O) + adv +…
Ex: She runs quickly.

II. Unit 6
1. Gerunds
Form:

like/love/hate/dislike/hate/ enjoy +V-ing
Use: to express hobbies.

Ex: I like swimming.

2. Ask for favor and offer assistance
( on page 55)

Ex:

T: Could you help me, please?

S: Of course. What can I do for you?
T: Can you open the windows, please?
S: Yes. I’ll help you.

T: Thank you.
B. Exercises

Exercise 1: Write past form of each verb
go, appear, sit, have, do, come

Exercise 2: Fill in with correct 
preposition.

1. I’ll see you … 9.00 … the morning.
2. Mary was born … December 25th.
3. Lan is sitting … Nga and Hoan.
4. I listen … music … the radio.
Exercise 3: Report these sentences.
a. “ Please stop making noise,” said Mrs.
Lan

b. “You should spend more time doing
your homework, Tam,” said Mr. Nam.
c. “Could you take these pictures to my
room, Tan?” asked Nga.

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

5. The telephone is near the lamp.

- Ss read the table on page 55 again to
make dialogues.

- Ss work in pairs.(if there is enough
time)

- Ask some pairs to say aloud.
- T corrects.

1. This/ Hoa’s living room.

2. There/ a rug/ in front of/ the fireplace.
3. A dog/ lying / rug.

4. There/ some pictures/ wall.
5. The telephone/ near/ lamp.

Exercise 5: Make conversations, using 
structures of asking for favor and
offering assistance.

E/ Guiding - Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Do exercises in workbook again.

- Revise knowledge of unit 5 and unit 6. Then do these exercises:
Exercise 1: Choose the word that has different pronunciation.

1. A. recycle B. sky
C. why D. century
2. A. meal B. ahead
C. reading D. please
3. A. youth B. thank
C. thirsty D. there

Exercise 2: Write correct forms of verbs.

1. My sister loves (cook), but she doesn’t like (wash) the dishes.

2. Nam (not, want) (go) to the Water Park because he (visit) it yesterday.
3. You (enjoy) (watch) the movie on TV last night?

4. We (collect) garbage in Lenin park next Sunday.

Week 18

Period 52

Preparing date: 18 -12 - 2011 Teaching date: 21 -12– 2011
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge
in Unit 7 and Unit 8.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
D/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming
Ask Ss to write nouns and adjectives about city and country.
Group 1 Group 2

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

II. New lesson

- Ask Ss to say the main knowledge of
unit 7.

- Ss say form and use of present perfect
tense.

- Ss say use of “for” and “since”.

- Ss make examples.

- Ss say form and give example.
- T corrects.

- Ss say the main knowledge of unit 8.
- Ss say form and use of Present Perfect
tense.

- T corrects and writes on the board.

- T says form and use of comparative
and superlative.

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy and give examples.

- T introduces the exercise.
- Ss read and do individual.
- T checks and corrects.
- Key:

1. for 2. from
3. same 4. as
5. since

- T introduces.
- Ss work in pairs.

- Ask Ss to write on the board.
- T corrects and gives marks.
- Key: 1. is getting
2. hasn’t visited .... went
3. Have you been… spent
4. does ………. am doing

- T guides. – Ss work individual.

A. Main knowledge
I. Unit 7

1. Present perfect
- Form: have/ has + PII

- Use: to express an action which began
in the past and continues to the present.
Adverb: for, since

Example:

(1) I have learned English for two years.
(2) She has lived here since 2000.

2. Comparison with:

as … as; the same as; different from.
Ex: This book is different from that one.
II. Unit 8

1. Present Progressive
Form:

am/ is/ are + getting/ becoming + adj
Use: to express changes

Ex: You are getting taller.
2. Comparative and superlative
a. Comparative

… short adj –er + than + …

… more + long adj + than + …
Ex: I am taller than you.

She is more beautiful than her sister.
b. Superlative

… the + short adj – est

… the most + long adj + …
Ex: He is shortest in my class.

This shirt is the most expensive one
of all.

B. Exercise

Exercise 1: Complete the sentences with
one word.

1. We have been to Hoi An … five days.
2. My sister’s taste is different …. mine.
3. Mr. Long is the …. ..age as my father.
4. Mai’s house is as big ……..ours.
5. It has rained ….. 2 o’clock.

Exercise 2: Write correct form of verbs.
1. Your son (get) taller, Mrs Mai.

2. Hung (not, visit) his grandparents
since he (go) to university.

3. You (be) to Nha Trang before?
Yes. I (spend) my holiday there last
summer.

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

- T checks and corrects.
- Key:

1. I haven’t seen Minh for six months.
2. Tom hasn’t visited his uncle for two
years.

3. The last time Hoa wrote to her parents
was three months.

but I (do) it tonight because she is sick.
Exercise 3: Rewrite the sentences
1. I last saw Minh six months ago.
2. The last time Tom visited his uncle
was two years ago.

3. Hoa hasn’t written to her parents for
three months.

D. Guiding - Homework

- Do the exercises again in notebook.
- Revise the knowledge for Test.

Week 18

Period 53

Preparing date: 17 - 12 - 2011 Teaching date: 20 -12– 2011

the first term test

A. Aims

- To check students’ result of study in the first semester

I. MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu

Vận dung

Cộng

Thấp Cao

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
LISTENING

Listen to a short recording about
Hoa's weekend and do exercise :

choose A, B, C or D

Số câu hỏi 4 1 5

Số điểm 1.6 0.4 2,0 ( 20 %)

VOCABULARY
+ GRAMMAR

- The present
perfect tense.
- Reported
speech

- Adj + enough
+ to V

-Preposition of
time.

- Word meaning
- Used to
- Use of verbs
after "eveyone"
- for or since

- Noun or

Adjective

Số câu hỏi 3 7 10

Số điểm 0.8 1.7 2.5 (25%)

LANGUAGE

FUNCTION Answer the questions

Số câu hỏi 3 2 5

Số điểm 0.6 0.4 1.0 (10%)

READING

Read a passage about Huong then answer the questions andchoose the best
options.

Số câu hỏi 3 2 5

Số điểm 1.5 1.0 2.5 (25%)

WRITING Write a

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

80-100 words about
Binh using the
prompts.

Số câu hỏi 10 10

Số điểm 2.0 2,0 (20%)

TS câu hỏi 13 12 10 35

TS điểm 4.5 3.5 2.0 10

II.Content
A. LISTENING

Listen to Hoa talking about her weekend and choose A, B, C or D to complete each of the following 
statements. (2.0 points)

1. Hoa played...on Saturday morning.

A. table tennisB. volleyball C. tennis D. chess

2. In the evening, ...cooked dinner.

A. Hoa B. Her sister C. Her husband D. Her sister's husband

3. They danced till...in the morning.

A. twelve B. three C. half past two D. two

4. On Sunday afternoon, Hoa ...

A. went out B. didn't go out C. didn't stay at home D. went to work

5. Hoa went to bed early on Sunday evening because she was...

A. happy B. tired C. excited D. sad

B. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY

I. Choose the best option A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentences (1.5 points).

1. How long ...you ...English? - For three years.

A. do....learn B. have ...learnt C. has ... learnt D. are... learning
2. Our lesson starts ...7 am. If we arrive ...7 am, we will be late.

A. at/ after B. at/ before C. in/ on D. at / between

3. My mother is out. Would you like to ...her a message?

A. live B. say C. leave D. phone

4. He walks...

A. slowly B. happy C. friendly D. pretty

5. Nga told me...in class activities.

A. participate B. participated C. to participate D. participating

II. There is a mistake in the four underlined parts A, B, C or D of each sentence. Find the mistakes
and correct them. (1.0 point)

1. My younger brother isn't enough old to go to school.
A B C D

2. What do you use to do when you felt unhappy?
A B C D

3. Everyone in my class were pleased with the result of the exam.
A B C D

4. It's four years for I last saw her.
A B C D

5. The price of this book is different of the price of that book.
A B C D

C. LANGUAGE FUNCTION

Match a question in column A with its suitable answer in column B. (1.0 point)

A B

1. Do you need any help?
2. What did you do yesterday?

3. Where should we put the armchair?
4. Could you do me a favor?

a. We should work hard.
b. What can I do for you?

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

5. What does your teacher look like? e. Yes. That's very kind of you.
f. She is tall with long black hair.

g. I stayed at home and helped my parents.
C. READING

Read the passage and do exercises:

My name is Huong. Do you have any close friends? I think we all have at least one close friend
in our life. And so do I. I have two close friends: Linh and Chi. We are in the same class at the primary
school and the secondary school. We are also neighbors, so we spend most of our time studying and
playing together. Chi is a beautiful girl with big black eyes and an oval rosy face. She is an intelligent
student and always studies the best in my class. She also likes reading. Linh isn't as beautiful as Chi but
she has a lovely smile and looks very healthy. Linh is very sporty. She spends most of her free time
playing sports. Linh is a volleyball star in our school team. She is very sociable and has a good sense of
humor. Her jokes always make us laugh. I love both of my friends and I always hope our friendship
will never die.

I. Answer the question. (1.5 points)

1. Do they spend most of their time studying and playing together?
2. What is Linh like?

3. Who has a good sense of humor, Linh or Chi?

II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D. (1.0 point)

1. ...is the best student in their class.

A. Huong B. Chi C. Linh D. Nobody

2. Which does the word "we" in the passage refer to?

A. Huong and Linh B. Linh and Chi C. Linh, Chi and Huong D. Huong and Chi
D. WRITING

Write a paragraph (about 80 - 100 words) about Binh. Use the information in the box as prompts.
(2.0 points)

He is Pham Van Binh. He is …..

III. ĐÁP ÁN, BIỂU ĐIỂM
Tape script:

I had a lovely time at the weekend. On Saturday morning, I got up early, I played tennis and
then my sister and her husband invited me to lunch. In the evening, some friends came to dinner and I
cooked a large meal. After dinner, we listened to records and danced till two in the morning. On
Sunday, I got up at eleven and went swimming. In the afternoon, I stayed at home. I wrote some letters
and did my homework. In the evening, I watched TV. I went to bed early because I was quite tired.

Question Key Point

A.
Listening
(2 points)

0. 4 point for each correct answer.

1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. B

2 points

Name: Pham Van Binh
Age: 14

Job: student

Appearance: tall, slim, short black hair
Characters: sociable, kind, generous

Address: Minh Duc Village, Tu Ky District, Hai Duong Province
Family: father, mother, younger sister- Hong

Friends: Lam, Tung

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

B
Grammar

and
Vocabulary

(2.5 points)

I- 0.3 point for each correct answer.

1. B 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. C

II- 0.2 point for each correct answer.
1. C -> old enough

2. A -> did
3. B -> was
4. C -> since
5. D -> from

2.5 points

C. Language
function
(1 point)

0.2 point for each correct answer.

1. e 2. g 3. c 4. b 5.f

1 point

D.
Reading
(2.5 points)

I- 0.5 point for each correct answer.

1. Yes, they do.

2. She is very sociable and has a good sense of humor.
3. Linh does. (or Linh has a good sense of humor)
II- 0.25 point for each correct answer.

1. B 2. C

2.5 points

E.
Writing
(2 points)

- accurate grammar: (1.0 pt)
- appropriate vocabulary: (1.0 pt)

2 points

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

Week 19

Period 54

Preparing date: -12 - 2011 Teaching date: -12– 2011
correcting the first term test

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to find out what they learn well as what they
didn't learn well in the first term . Depend on the result of the the first term test, Ss will
continue their methods and skills to revise the old knowledge and remember it. they able
to learn new knowledge better.

B/ Language content:

- The skills of listening, reading, writing

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Material: papers

E. Correcting the test
1. Good aspect:
2. Bad aspect :

+ Ss get good marks:

8A: L.Anh, M.Anh, Thu Anh, Bao, Duy, Huong,Tr.Manh,Xuyen,
8B,C: nobody

+ Ss get bad marks :

8A: Duong, Thu Ha, Ng.Ha, Lam, Duc Manh, Nhi, Th.Nhung,Quynh
8B: 19/23 sts

8C: 19/25 sts

3. Comment mistakes Correcting/ methods

3.1 Listening

3.2 Language focus

3.3 Reading

3.4 Writing

*Listening : be more careful
*Language focus

1. used to + infinitive
2.V + Adv

3. enjoy + V-ing

5. ask sbd =o innfinitive
*Reading :

3. A( like =to be interested in)
4. Great = good

* Writing: - tense: Past simple tense (to
retell the story)

- Preposisions and articles
8B,C: did dadly

4. Point and key
* Tape script:

My name is Lan. I am very happy to have a lot of good friends. The person who I 
spend most of time with is my cousin, Huong. She is at the same age as me. At school I 
have a lot of friends because my friends say that “I am both kind and intelligent”. 
Everyday I often go to school by bike. In free time I don't like watching TV but I really 
enjoy reading books and magazines. I am very proud of our friends.

Question Key Point

A.
Listening
(2 points)

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

B.
Language

focus
(3 points)

I- 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. D 5. C

II- 1. C 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. F 0.3 for each

C.
Reading
(2.5 points)

1. B 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. C 0.5 for each

D.
Writing
(2.5 points)

1. Once a poor farmer had a daughter named Little Pea.
2. After her mother died, her father married again.

3. The stepmother was cruel so Little Pea had to do chores all
day.

4. The fairy appeared and changed Little Pea’s rags into 
beautiful clothes.

5. The Prince found the lost shoes and decided to marry 
Little Pea.

0.5 for each

Week 19
Period 55

Preparing date: 01 -01 - 2012 Teaching date: 03 - 01 - 2012
unit 9: a first-aid course

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students can know what they should do in situations which
require first-aid.

* Voc: emergency, ambulance, conscious, bleed, blood, wound, pressure
* Gram: promise + Future clause

B/ Teaching aids:

picture, cassette, tape, extra-board
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,

D/ Procedures:
I. Warm up

- T hangs the picture on the board and
introduces topic of the unit.

- Ss names things on the picture and give
other names of things which are used for

I. Getting started

What would you do in these situations
which require first-aid?

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

first-aid.

- T writes on the board.

- Ss read the words in chorus.
- Ask Ss to read the situations and
discuss in pairs to answer question.
- T asks some pairs to say their ideas.
II. Listen and read

- T introduces the dialogue.

- Ask Ss to look the dialogue to look for
new words.

T elicits some new words.
picture
picture on page 82

situation
translation
noun of verb “bleed”

situation

explanation
- T gives Ss some questions.

- Ask Ss to look at book, listen to tape
and answer the questions.

- T checks and corrects.

Key: (1) Lan and a nurse are talking.
(2) Because she fell off her bike and hit
her head on the road.

(3) Yes, she is.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T calls 2 pairs to read it aloud.
- T listens and corrects.

- T hangs the extra-board on the board.
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
find correct words to complete the
paragraph.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

*Key: (1) fell (2) conscious
(3) cut (4) bleeding

(5) ambulance (6) awake
- T introduces and guides.

- Ss read the topic and select.
- T listens and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
find model sentences.

- T introduces.
- Ss listen and copy.

- Ask Ss to answer the question “What
will you do next weekend?”

oil, ice, water pack, alcohol.
* Possible answers:

- A girl has a burn on her arm: use cool
water/ ice to ease the pain.

- A boy has a bad cut on his leg: use
sterile dressing to cover the cut.
- A girl has a nose bleed: use cotton/
handkerchief to stop the bleed.

- A boy has a bee sting: use medicated
oil to put on it.

II. Listen and read

*Vocabulary

emergency (n) : cÊp cøu,

tình trạng khẩn cấp
ambulance (n) : xe cøu th¬ng

conscious (adj) : tØnh táo
bleed (v) : chảy máu
blood (n) : m¸u
wound (n) : vÕt th¬ng
pressure (n) : søc Ðp
1. Comprehension questions
a. Who are talking?

b. Why is the student hurt?
c. Is she conscious?

2. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

3. Gap fill

There was an emergency at Lan’s
school. A student (1) ………….. off her
bike and hit her head on the road. She
was (2) ……… but she cut her head
and the (3) ……….. was (4) ……..
badly. Lan telephone Bach Mai hospital
and asked the nurse to send an (5) ……..
to Quang Trung school. Lan was asked

to keep the student (6) ………. while
waiting for the ambulance.

4. Select the topics covered in the 
dialogue.

Answer: a, b, c, e, f.
5. Grammar

(1) The ambulance will be there in about
ten minutes.

-> Future Simple tense

(2) I promise I’ll keep her awake.

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 4 on page 56 in workbook.
Complete the paragraph with given words.
Note: victim (n) : nạn nhân

accident (n) : tai n¹n
Ex: (1) accident

- Prepare Unit 9: Speak + Listen

Read the lesson before; revise structures of offer and request

Week 19
Period 56

Preparing date: 01 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 04 - 01 - 2012
unit 9: a first-aid course

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to make and respond to
requests, offers, promises and listen for details about the activities taking place in an
emergency room.

* Grammar : Requests, Offers, Promise
B/ Teaching aids:

cassette, tape, textbook
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Brain storming

Group 1 Group 2

have a burn sterile dressing

II. New lesson
1. Presentation

- T gives Ss some situations and asks Ss
to make sentences.

- T writes on the board.

1. I want you to get me a bandage. How
can I say?

2. I’d like you to come to my party. How
can I say?

3. I tell my mother that I’ll surely finish
my work before bedtime. How can I
say?

- Ask Ss to say the forms.

- Ask Ss to look at the phrases in book
and say form of verbs after them.

- Ss read the phrases for requests, offers,
promises and respond to them.

2. Practice

- Ss look at the pictures and say what are

I. Speak

1. Model sentences

(1) Can you get me a bandage, please?
(2) Would you like to come to my party?
(3) I promise I’ll finish my work before
bedtime.

2. Forms (on page 81)
a. Requests

Will/ Would / Can / Could you please +
infinitive + …?

b. Offers

Will/ Won’t you

Shall I + infinitive ….?
Can I

Would you like + to infinitive + …
c. Promise

I will + infinitive + … I promise

I promise I’ll / I won’t + infinitive + …

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

happening.

- T introduces the example.
- One pair read it aloud.

- Ss work in pairs to practice.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T asks some pairs to say aloud.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Production

- Divide the class into 2 groups.

- Group 1 gives situations and group 2
makes conversations. Then exchanges.
1. Pre-listening

- Ask Ss to look at the picture in book
and match the letters A, B, C, D, E, and
F to the correct words in the box.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the words in chorus.
2. While- listening

- Ask Ss to listen to tape to order the
things.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to look at book to describe the

picture.

- Ss work in groups of 3, 4.
- T checks and corrects.

I promise to +infinitive + …
3. Practice with a partner.
Ex:

b. Sister: Can I get you some medicine /
water?

Boy: Yes, please

or: No, I’m fine. Thank you.
c. A: Can you give me a bandage?
B: OK. Here you are.

d. Daughter: Would you like some
medicine / water?
Mother: That would be nice.

e. Boy: I promise I won’t play soccer in
house again.

Mother: I hope so. / Don’t forget. / …
4. Making conversations.

II. Listen
1. Matching

A: ambulance

B: wheelchair: ghế đẩy
C: crutches: ụi nng

D: eye chart: bảng đo thị lực
E: scale: cái cân

F: stretcher: cái cáng
2. Ordering

a. stretcher
b. wheelchair
c. ambulance
d. eye chart
e. scale
f. crutches
3. Write it up

Ex: This is the emergency room in a
large hospital. Everyone is in a hurry…

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the phrases and sentences on page 81.
- Do exercise 6 on page 57.

Ex: a. Could you open the windows, please?

- Prepare part: Read: Read the situations and the way to help the victims.

Week 20
Period 57

Preparing date: 06 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 09 - 01 - 2012
unit 9: a first-aid course

Lesson 3: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know the instructions about some
more situations requiring first-aid.

* Voc: elevate, minimize, sterile, fainting
B/ Teaching aids:

2 pictures, textbook

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Bingo!

- Ss write four situations which need first-aid. Example: cut, …
- T reads: burn, cut, bee sting, snake bite, fainting, shock, nose bleed.
II. New lesson

E
.

Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 2, 3 on page 55, 56 in workbook.

Ask Ss to say the requirement of the exercise and topics of the columns.
Ex: (1) victim (2) fainting (3) handkerchief
- Prepare part: Write

Revise parts of a letter.
Read the lesson before.

1. Pre-reading

- T hangs tow pictures on the board to
elicit some new words.

translation
= clear
situation

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the lesson: We are going
to read a text about first-aid for burns,
shock, fainting.

- T introduces the exercise and guides.
- Ss read the statements and predict.
- T checks some Ss.

2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and check their
prediction.

- T checks 2 Ss.

- Ask Ss to read the text again and match
the words with their meanings.

- T checks and corrects.
- Ss read the words in chorus.

Key: 1- d, 2 – a, 3- f, 4 – b, 5 – c, 6-
e.

- T asks Ss some questions.
- Ss listen and answer.
* Key:

a. When the person gets fainting.
b. No, we shouldn’t.

c. Because it minimizes tissue damage.
3. Post-reading

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures, T covers
the sentences on them.

- Ss say the treatments for each case.

- Ss work in groups of 3 or 4.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to say their knowledge about
treatment of other cases need first-aid.

* Vocabulary

elevate (v) : nâng lên

minimize (v) : gim n mc ti thiu
sterile (adj) : vô trùng

fainting (n) : c¬n ngÊt (xØu)

1. Choose a correct case for each of the
following treatments.

* Prediction
* Reading

A: Fainting: a, c, e
B: Shock: b

C: Burns: d
2. Matching

A B

1. flying flat
2. force
3. revive
4. overheat
5. ease
6. tissue

a. cố ép

b. làm quá nóng
c. làm giảm đau
d. nằm ngửa
e. mô tế bào
f. tỉnh lại
3. Answer the questions

a. When do we leave the patient lying
flat?

b. Should we give a person who gets
shock a cup of water?

c. Why do we have to cool the burns
immediately?

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Week 20
Period 58

Preparing date: 08 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 11 - 01 - 2012
unit 9: a first-aid course

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a thank-you note.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warmup Brainstorming
- asks Ss two questions:

+ How many parts are there in an informal letter?
+ What should each part include?

- calls some groups to check

- gives feedback and corrects, then asks Ss some more questions:
+ When do you write a thank-you note?

+ Have you ever written or received a thank-you note?

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn to write a thank-you note
II. New lesson

1. Pre-writing

- T sets the scene: Nga was sick and she
had to go to hospital. After she left the
hospital, she wrote a thank-you note to
Hoa. Why and what did she write?

? Complete the thank-you note Nga sent
to Hoa after she left the hospital. Use the
correct tense forms of the verbs in
brackets

- Ss read the note and complete it with
right verb forms.

- Ss work individual and then compare
with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirements.

- Ask Ss to read the questions and write
their short answers in notebook.

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T asks some Ss to read their answers

1. Complete the thank-you note.
Example:

send -> sent
* Answer key:

(1) was (2) were
(3) helped (4) came
(5) am (6) will phone
2. Write a thank-you note to a friend 
and invite him/her to go on a picnic 
with you.

*Comprehension questions: (poster)
1. What did Hoa sent Nga?
2. When did she sent her?
3. What were they like?
4. How does Nga feel now?

5. Does she want to invite Hoa to her
place on the weekend?

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

aloud.

- Ask Ss to answer T’ questions.

+ How many parts are there in the note?
What are they?

+ How many paragraphs are there in the
body? What do you write in each

paragraph?

+ What tense of verbs do we use?
2. While-writing

- T asks Ss to write a thank you note to a
friend, base on the note in exercise 1.
- Ss write individual. (10’)

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- Ss share with a partner.

- T corrects their typical mistakes on the
board.

- T checks some Ss and corrects.
3. Post-writing

- T encourages Ss to write another letter
with their imagined situations.

- Ss work in 4 groups.
- T checks and corrects.

(Ss' answers)
* Parts of the note
- Opening : Dear …,
- Body:

+ Use past simple tense to write about
first four questions.

+ Use present simple to write about
your feel now and what you want
(3 next questions).

+ Use future simple tense to write
about how you will contact your
friend (last question).

- Closing: Yours,/ Your friend,
…….

* Example
Dear …,

Thank you very much for …… you sent/
gave me while I …. / on my 14th

birthday. They were …
3. Write another letter.
Guided situations:

- Thank you your friend for book/
flowers / postcard / … he/she gave you
on March 8th/ / your birthday. You invite 
him / her to go fishing.

- ….

E. Guiding – Homework

- Rewrite the letter to a friend.

- Do exercise 7 on page 58 in workbook.
Ex: let -> will let

- Prepare part: Language focus

Read the exercises and do them before.

Week 20
Period 59

Preparing date: 09 - 01 - 2011 Teaching date: 12 - 01 - 2011

unit 9: a first-aid course

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to further practice “in order to, so as to” and use
“will/ shall” in future tense and to make requests, offers or promises.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

I. Warm up Transmit

Team 1: (5 Ss): My father will go to Hanoi next month.

Team 2: (5 Ss): Will you open the door, please?

After the game, T asks Ss to compare the uses of “will” in the sentences.
(1) “will” in the future tense.

(2) “will” in request sentence.
II. New lesson

- T introduces requirement and example of the
exercise and writes on the board.

- Ss read and answer T’s questions.
+ What does it mean?

+ What is form of verb “let”?

+ When do we use “so as to / in order to”?
- Ss work individual then compare with a
partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T sets the scene: Ba is talking to his mother
about his aunt Mai. Now we use correct words
or short form to complete the dialogue.

- Ss work in pairs.

- Ask some pairs to read aloud.

- Ask Ss to say form and use of future simple
tense.

- T sets the scene: Nga is helping her

grandmother. Look at the picture and complete
the sentences.

- T introduces the first picture and example.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- Ask 2 Ss to write on the board.
- Some pairs read the dialogues aloud.
- Ask Ss to say other form of “will”.

- Ask one S to read the requirement and say the
way to do the exercise.

- Ask Ss to look at the picture a) and say its
meaning.

- T introduces the example.

- Ss read the verbs in box and say their
meanings.

- Ss look at the pictures and work in pairs to
make requests, offers and promises.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to say the form and use of offers and
requests with “will, shall”.

gives instructions: work with a partner, look at
the pictures. Make requests, offers or promises.
Use the words in the box and will or shall.
- gives an example: picture a

T: (The garbage is overflowing. Somebody
should empty it). So we can make a request:
Will you empty the garbage can, please?
- runs through all the pictures and the words in
the box

- asks Ss to do the exercise
- gets feedback and corrects

1. In order to/ so as to
* Model sentences:

I always keep the window open in order to/ so
as to let fresh air in.

*Form:

S + V...+ in order to/ so as to + V(inf)

Use: we use in order to/ so as to before a verb

clause to talk about purposes

* Meaning: để

Language Focus1: P86 Match and write a
complete sentence by using in order to / so as“

to .”

Key: A in order to / so as to B
2 c
3 b
4 e
5 a
6 d
2. Future Simple

They will go to Ha Noi next week
Form: S + will/shall (‘ll ) + V(inf)...
S + won’t/ shan’t + V...

Use: we use the Future Simple to talk about
future actions or events

*Note: The Future Simple is also used to make
requests, offers and promises

Language Focus2: P86. Complete the
dialogue

Ex: (0) will
Key:

(1) will (2) Will
(3) won’t (4) Shall
(5) will (6) ’ll

3. Complete the sentences.
Example:

Will you open the window, please, Nga?
* Key:

b. Will you give it to me, please?

c. Will you answer the telephone,please?
d. Will you turn on the TV, please?
e. Will you pour a glass of water for me?
f. Will you get me a cushion, please?
* Requests

Will you + infinitive + …, please?

To ask somebody to do something politely.

4.Make requests, offers or promises.
Example:

a. Will you empty the garbage, please?
Key:

b. Will you paint the door for me, please?
or: Shall I paint the door for you?

c. I promise I will study harder.
d. Shall I carry the bag for you?
e. Will you hang the washing, please?
or: Shall I carry hang the washing for you?
f. Will you cut the grass, please?

* Offer, Promise

- Shall I + infinitive + …

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

- I promise I will / won’t + infinitive …
or: I will/ won’t + infinitive + … I promise.
-> to express promise.

Language Focus4: P88
Answer key (suggested ideas)

b. Will you paint the door, please?/ I will paint
the door tomorrow.

c. Will you study harder, please?/ I will study
harder.

d. Will you carry the bag for me, please?/ Shall
I carry the bag for you?

e. Will you hang the clothes, please?/ Shall I
hang the clothes for you?

f. Will you cut the grass, please?/ I will cut the
grass for you.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Do exercise 6 on page 57 in workbook.

Complete the dialogues with expressions for requests, offers, promises or instructions (lêi híng dÉn).
- Prepare Unit 10: Getting started + Listen and read

Week 21
Period 60

Preparing date: 13 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 16 - 01 - 2012
unit 10: Recycling

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do something to protect the
environment and save natural resources.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,

D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

- Divide the class into 2 groups to think
of ways to reduce the amount of garbage
they produce.

- 2 groups write on the board.
- T checks and corrects.
- T introduces the example.

- Ss work in pairs, Ss can use the words
in the box.

- T checks and corrects.

II. The lesson

- T elicits some new words.
situation
>< increase
use something again

situation

(to) keep something safe from danger
example

mime

Checking: Matching

I. Getting started 
Brainstorming

reuse plastic bags
Example:

S1: We should use cloth bags instead of
plastic bags.

S2: You’re right. We should also reuse
plastic bags.

II. Listen and read
* Vocabulary

over package (v) : gãi bäc nhiÒu lần
reduce (v) : làm giảm

reuse (v) : tái sư dơng
recycle (v) : t¸i chÕ
protect (v) : bảo vệ

natural resource (n) : nguồn tài nguyên
thiªn nhiªn

(to) throw away : nÐm ®i

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

- Sets the scene: you’re going to listen to

a representative from “Friends of the
Earth”, Miss Blake, talking to the
students of Quang Trung school about
recycling

- Ask Ss to read the short paragraph and
answer question.

Key: It shows people how to protect the
environment and save natural resources.
- T introduces the situation of the

dialogue.

- Ss listen to the tape 2 times.
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T checks some pairs and corrects their
pronunciation.

- T introduces the questions.
- Ss read all the questions.

- T explains difficult questions if
necessary.

- Ss ask and answer in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.

- T introduces new structures.
- Ss read and copy.

- Ss make sentences if have time.

- asks students to discuss the question:
What could we do to protect the
environment?

- asks students to report their discussion
results to the class

- gives feedback and corrects

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.
Answer the question:

What does Friends of the Earth do?

2. Answer

a. Reduce means not buying products
which are over packaged.

b. We can reuse things like envelopes,
glass, old plastic bottles and old plastic
bags.

c. Recycle means not just throwing
things away. Try and find another use for

them.

d. We can look for information on

recycling things by having a contact with
an organization like Friends of the Earth,
going to the local library, or asking our
families and friends.

e. Because when we throw them away,
they could stay very long and could not
be self-destroyed.

3.Grammar
*Model sentences

(1) It is not difficult to remember …
adj to infinitive

(2) I am please that you want to know …
adj clause

4. Production: Discussion

What could we do to protect the
environment?

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 1 on page 59 in workbook.
Tìm và sửa từ viÕt sai chÝnh t¶

Ex: a. botles (x) -> bottles
- Prepare part: Speak + Listen
Read the lesson before.

Week 21
Period 61

Preparing date: 15 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 18 - 01 - 2012
unit 10: Recycling

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to give and respond to instructions
and listen for specific information about making compost.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape, picture
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,

D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up : Matching (poster)

- asks Ss to match each word with its meaning

A B
paper

plastic

vegetable matter
glass

metal
fabric
leather

chÊt rau
kim loại
nhựa
giấy
da

thuỷ tinh
vải, sợi
- gives feedback and corrects

- introduces the lesson: today you are going to speak about recycling things and listen
about how to make compost

II. New lesson
1. Pre-speaking

- T hangs the picture on the board and
introduces situation.

- Ask Ss to group the items in the

picture.

- Ss work in groups of 3, 4.

- T checks, corrects and writes on the
board.

2. While-speaking

- Call on 2 pairs to read the dialogues.
- Ss work in pairs to make other
dialogues.

- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-speaking

- Ask Ss to answer the questions.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs.

1. Pre-listening

- T elicits some new words.
- T introduces situation.

- Ss read the questions and guess
answers.

I. Speak

1. Which group does each item belong 
to?

Paper: used paper, old newspaper, old
book, cardboard boxes, …
Glass: bottles, glasses, jars.

Plastic: plastic bags, plastic bottles,
bucket …

Metal: food cans, drinking cans, tins …
Fabric: clothes, pieces of materials …
Leather: shoes, sandals, schoolbags …
Vegetable matter: fruit peels, vegetables
….

2. Model dialogues
a.

S1: Which group do clothes belong to?
S2: Put them in “fabric”.

S1: What can we do with those clothes?
S2: We can recycle them and make them
into paper and shopping bags.
b.

S1: Is fruit “vegetable matter”?

S2: That’s right.

S1: What will do with it?

S2: We make it into compost and
fertilize our field.

3. Discussion

a. What do you often do with the
garbage at home?

b. Do you group them?
c. What groups can we sell?
II. Listen

* Vocabulary

compost (n) : phân xanh
heap (n) : đống

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

2. While-listening

- Ss listen and check their prediction.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to retell how to make compost.

- Ss work in 4 groups.

- T checks and corrects.

* Check the correct answers.

Prediction Listening

a.
b.
c.
d.

….

…
…
…

A
B
B
B
* Retell

E. Production: Ordering statements (poster)
- asks Ss to put the statements in the

right order

- gets feedback and corrects

1. Use shovels to turn the compost.
2. Start a compost heap.

3. Place in the garden.
4. Use as fertilizer.
5. Keep for six months

F. Guiding – Homework

- Do exercise 3 on page 60 in workbook: Complete the sentences with words beginning
with “re”.

Ex: a. reuse
- Prepare: Read

Week 22
Period 62

Preparing date: 27 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 30 - 01 - 2012

unit 10: Recycling

Lesson 3: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the text about how things are
recycled.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, picture, extra-board

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,

D/ Procedures:
I. Warm up:

Brainstorming

- asks Ss to think of things can be recycled
- writes on the board

plastic glass paper
metal

vegetables tires drinking cans

- introduces the lesson: today you are going to read about recycling things

II. New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
picture

drawing
translation

situation
example
situation

* Vocabulary

tire (n) : lèp xe
pipe (n) : èng, s¸o

covering (n) : vỏ bọc, thảm (sàn nhà)
melt (v) : ch¶y ra, tan ra

glassware (n) : đồ dùng bằng thuỷ tinh
deposit (n) : tiền đặt cọc

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

translation
Checking: What and Where

- T introduces the text by hanging the
picture on the board.

- Ask Ss to read the exercise 2 and guess.
- T checks some pairs and writes on the
board.

2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and check their prediction.
- Call on some Ss to write on the board.
- Ask some Ss to say their answers.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss read the text again and answer the
questions in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects:
Lucky numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c b lk a lk lk d e

3. Post-reading

- T explains new grammar.
- Ss say form.

- gives instructions: Complete the sentences
to make a list of recycled things basing on
the reading text.

- asks Ss to complete the sentences
- gets feedback and corrects

- Ask Ss to work in 4 groups to answer the
question.

- Ss say their answers.

dung (n) : ph©n thó vËt

2. Complete the sentences to make a list of 
recycled things.

Example:

Car tires are recycled to make pipes, shoes
and sandals.

a. Prediction
b. Answer

- Car tires are recycled to make pipes and
floor coverings.

- Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled.
- Glass is broken up, melted and made into
new glassware.

- Drink cans are bought back for recycling.
- Household and garden waste is made into
compost.

1. Answer

a, People cleaned and refilled empty milk
bottles.

b. The glass is broken up, melted and made
into new glassware.

c. The Oregon government made a new law
that there must be a deposit on all drink
cans. The deposit is returned when people
brink the cans back for recycling.

d. Compost is made from, household and
garden waste.

e. If we have a recycling story to share, we
can call or fax the magazine at 5265456.

3. Grammar

- Empty bottles are cleaned and refilled.
- The glass is collected and sent …
S be PII

- > Passive Form

4. Recall: Ex2-P93
Answer key

1. Car tires are recycled to make pipes and
floor coverings.

2. Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled with

milk.

3. Glass is broken up, melted and made into
new glassware.

4. Drink cans are brought back for
recycling.

5. Household and garden waste is made into
compost

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 2 on page 59 in workbook.
Ex: protest - > protect

- Prepare: Write

Read the lesson before.

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Period 63

Preparing date: 29 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 01 - 02 - 2012
unit 10: Recycling

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a set of instruction, using the
sequencing.

B/ Teaching aids: 
 textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up : Revision (poster)

- asks Ss to change some sentences into passive
1. People speak English everywhere.

2. Most children like cartoons.
3. We do not use things carefully.
4. The children like candies.
5. Vegetarians do not eat meat.
- gives feedback and corrects

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn to write instructions

II. New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T elicits some new words.
situation

mime

translation

visual
drawing

mime

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the situation: a text about
recycling paper.

- T explains requirement and example.
- Ss complete the text individual.
- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask one student to read the completed
text aloud.

- Ask Ss to read the instructions again
and find how to write instructions.
- T checks, corrects and writes on the
board.

2. While-writing

- T explains the requirement.

- Ss look at the pictures and use the
given words and sequencings to write

instructions individual (7’).

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- Ask Ss to write the instructions on the
board.

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-writing

- Ask Ss to write instructions about
recycling something they know.

* Vocabulary
soak (v) : ng©m
press (v) : Ên, Ðp
mash (v) : nghiỊn

wire mesh (n) : mắt lới bằng thép
bucket (n) : xô, thùng

mix (v) : trén

1. Complete the recycling instructions.
Ex: (0) soak

(1) use (2) mix
(3) place (4) press
(5) wrap (6) wait

(7) dry

* How to write instructions

- Use sequencing: First, Then, Next,
After that, Finally.

- Sentences without subjects.

2. Make the instructions with given 
words.

a. First, take the used tea leaves from the
tea pot.

b. Next, scatter (rắc, rải) the tea leaves
on a tray.

c. Then, dry the tea leaves in the sun.
d. Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for
future use.

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

- Ss work in 4 groups (5’).

- T asks Ss to read their instructions.
- T corrects.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Rewrite their instructions in notebooks.
- Prepare: Language focus

Read the lesson and do the exercises before.

Week 22
Period 64

Preparing date: 30 - 01 - 2012 Teaching date: 02 - 02 - 2012
unit 10: Recycling

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use Passive forms and adjectives to
practice.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Pelmanism
Infinitive – Past Participle

break wash dry mix melt build

broken washed dried mixed melted built

II. New lesson

- T elicits some new words.
translation

situation
example
mime

- T introduces the pictures and
requirements of the exercise.

- Ss read the instructions and reorder the
pictures. (individual)

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- T explains the example to Ss.

* Vocabulary

detergent liquid (n): dung dịch thuốc tẩy
melt (v) : nấu chảy

mixture (n) : hỗn hỵp
dip (v) : nhóng

1. Work with a partner.

* Put the pictures in the correct order
1 – 4 – 3 – 5 – 2 – 6

* Rewrite the sentences in the passive
form

Ex:

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

+ What do they mean?

+ Find S, O, and V in the sentences.
+ Find difference in the sentences.
+ What is form of Passive in Present
Simple?

+ When do we use the structure?

+ How do we change an active sentence
into passive sentence?

- Ss change the sentences into passive.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T calls Ss to write on the board and
some say aloud their sentences.
- T corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the scene in book.
- T explains the example.

+ What does it mean?
+ What is tense of verb?
+ Is it active or passive?
+ What is its form?

- Ss complete the dialogue in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the example and explains.
- Ss find structure.

- Ss work in pairs to complete the
dialogues.

- T checks and corrects.

- T explains the example.

- What is after adjective “delighted”?
- T introduces the requirement and
situation.

- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

V O

The glass is broken into small pieces.
S be PII

- Passive form is in the Present Simple
S + am/ is/are + PII

- Use: Câu bị động là chủ ngữ chịu sự tác
động của động từ.

- How to change active into passive
Active Passive
O S

V am / is / are + PII
S by + O

b. Then the glass is washed with a
detergent liquid.

c. The glass pieces are dried completely.
d. They are mixed with certain specific
chemicals.

e. The mixture is melted until it becomes
a liquid.

f. A long pipe is used, it is dipped into
the liquid, then the liquid is blown into
intended shapes.

2. Complete the dialogue.
Ex:

When will the project be started,Doctor?
S be PII

* Passive Form in the Future Simple
will + be + PII

(1) will be showed / shown
(2) Will it built

(3) will be finished
(4) Will … be made

3. Complete the dialogues. Use the 
words in the box.

Ex:

It’s difficult to follow your directions.
adj to-infinitive

(1) easy to understand
(2) hard to believe
(3) dangerous to go
(4) important to wait
4. Complete the letter

Ex: Your grandfather and I are delighted

be adj
that you passed your English exam.
that-clause

Answer:
(1) was happy
(2) am relieved
(3) is afraid
(4) Are you sure
(5) am certain

E. Guiding – Homework

- Redo the exercises in notebook.

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

Week 23
Period 65

Preparing date: 03- 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 06 - 02 - 2012

unit 11: traveling around viet nam

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will understand dialogue between Hoa and Tim’s family.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, picture

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,

D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up
Brainstorming
- asks Ss some questions:

+ Are there any places of interest in Vietnam?
+ What places of interest have you visited?
+ What places of interest do you know?

- asks Ss to call out the names of places of interest that they know
Con Son Ha Long Bay

Sa Pa Hue

Hung Temple
Huong Pagoda The Temple of Litereture

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn Unit 11- Traveling around Vietnam
- T hangs the picture and introduces the

situation.

- Ss work in groups of 3,4. (1’)
- T checks and corrects.

II. Listen and read

- T elicits some new words.
situation
drawing

visual
translation

drawing
situation
translation

example
Checking: Matching
- T introduces situation.
- Ss listen to tape 2 times.

- Ss read the dialogue in groups. (5’)
- T asks some groups to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.
- T introduces the exercise.
- Ask Ss to read the sentences.

- T explains difficult sentences if necessary.
- Ss read the dialogue again and do the
exercise individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.

I. Getting started

Match the places of interest in Vietnam with
their manes.

a) – 2: Ngo Mon (Gate)
b) – 4: Nha Rong Harbor

c) – 1: The Temple of Literature
d) – 3: Ha Long Bay

II. Listen and read

* Vocabulary

crop (n) : vô mïa
sugar cane (n) : c©y mÝa

water buffalo (n) : con trâu nớc

forty-minute drive (n) : chuyến đi xe 40
phót

corn (n) : ng«
ride (v) : cìi
prefer (v) : thÝch h¬n
luggage (n) : hµnh lÝ

1. Practice the dialogue in groups.

2. Answer True or False. Then correct
false sentences.
* Answer:

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and pick
out sentences containing situations

mentioned below:
+ to express interests
+ to express requests
- Ss read aloud.

- T listens, corrects and writes on the board.
- T introduces new structures of request.

c. F f. F
* Correction

c. bus -> car

f. Not only rice and corn but also sugar
canes are grown around Hanoi.

3. Grammar

* To express interest:

+ I’d like you to meet my parents and my

sister, Shannon.

+ It’s nice to meet you finally, Hoa.
+ It’s great to be in Vietnam.

+ I’d like to sit with Tom and Shannon.
* To express request:

+ Would you mind sitting in the front seat
of the taxi, Mr. Jones?

+ Would you mind if I took a photo?

E. Consolidation

- Ask 2 pairs to read the dialogues aloud.
- T asks Ss some questions:

+ Where does Hoa meet Tim’s family?

+ How many people are there in Tim’s family? Who are they?
+ How long does it take them to drive to the city center?

F. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Read the dialogue again.

- Do exercise 1 on page 65 in workbook.

Reorder the dialogue of Nam, James and Trang.
Ex: Nam: c)

- Prepare part: Speak + Language focus 3,4.
Read the lesson and do the exercises before.

Week 23
Period 66

Preparing date: 05 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 08 - 02 - 2012
unit 11: traveling around viet nam

Lesson 2: Speak 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to make and respond to formal
requests using “mind”.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up:

- sets up a situation: The door is open. Now I want one of you to close the door. So what
can I say to you?

Will you close the door, please?
Could

Can
Would

T: Are there any other ways of making a request?

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn to make and respond to requests
using mind and listen about the place directions

II. New lesson
1. Presentation

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

- Ss read in pairs.

- Ask Ss to find form and use of
structures.

+ What do they mean?
+ What is after it?
+ When do we use it?
- T writes on the board.
- Ss copy.

- T makes examples with a good student.

2. Practice

- T introduces the exercise and guides.
- Ss work the example.

- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.

3. Production

- Ask Ss to read the situation and useful
expressions.

- T does model with a good student.
- Ss work with a partner.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.

seat of the taxi?
Mr. Jones: No problem.

(2)Tim: Would you mind if I took a
photo?

Hoa: Not at all.
* Form:

Would you mind + V-ing …?
Do you mind

Reply: - Agree: + No, I don’t mind.
+ No, of course not.
+ Not at all.

- Disagree: + I’m sorry. I can’t.
+ I’m sorry, that is not possible.
-> To request somebody to do
something.

Would you mind if + S + V(Past S) +…?
Do you mind if + S + V (Present S) +…?
-> To get allow to do something.

Reply: - Agree: + Please do.

+ Please go ahead.
- Disagree: + I’d rather you didn’t.
+ I’d prefer you didn’t.

- Example:

a, T: Do you mind opening the window?
S: No, I don’t mind.

b, S: Would you mind if I asked you a
question?

T: Please do.

Practice:. Language focus 3.
Work with a partner.

a, S1: Would you mind moving your
car?

S2: No, of course not.

b, S1: Would you mind putting out your
cigarette?

S2: Not at all.
*. Make dialogues
Example:

T: Would you mind if I asked you a
question?

S: No, I don’t mind.

T: I want to visit a market. Could you
suggest one?

S: I suggest going to Ben Thanh Market.
T: That sounds interesting. Thank you.
S: You’re welcome.

E. Guiding - Homework
- Learn the structures.

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Week 23
Period 67

Preparing date: 06 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 09 - 02 – 2012
unit 11: traveling around viet nam

Lesson 3: Listen 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to fill in the map by listening the
place directions and use present and past participles to describe things and people.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

II. Check old lesson Test 15’

Write requests and responses, using Do/Would you mind + V-ing/ if + S + V …?
a. ask/ a question (v)

b. use / your red pen (x)
c. wait / moment (v)
d. give / me / a book (x)
e. turn on/ TV (v)

Answer and Mark: Each correct sentence is 1 mark.
a. S1: Would you mind if I asked you a question?

S2: No problem.

b. S1: Do you mind if I use your red pen?

S2: I’d rather you didn’t.

c. S1: Do you mind waiting a moment?
S2: No, of course not.

d. S1: Would you mind giving me a book?
S2: I’m sorry. I can’t.

e. S1: Do you mind if I turn on TV?
S2: Please do.

III. New lesson
1. Pre-listening

- T teaches vocabulary

Checking vocab: Slap the board

- sets the scene: Tim’s family is visiting
some places in Ha Noi. Now look at the
map. These are the places that they are
visiting and will come to.

- runs through the box

- asks Ss to guess the position for each
place given in the box.

- gets feedback and writes some guesses
on the board

2. While-listening

- gets students to listen to the tape twice

I. Listen

Vocabulary

- to go back = return: quay l¹i, trë
l¹i

- a highway (explanation): đờng quốc lộ
- to be starving = hungry: đói

- to book (explanation): đặt trớc
- a bridge (picture) cầu

Open Prediction

Prediction Listening

a
b
c
d
e

…

…
…
…
…

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

and check their predictions.
- gets feedback

- asks Ss to listen again to correct their
answers

- gives feedback and corrects
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to look at the map and retell the
direction.

- Ss work in 2 groups.
- T checks and corrects.

Answer key

a. restaurant d. pagoda
b. hotel e. temple
c. bus station

* Retell
Example:

The Jones family stayed in a hotel on
Phong Lan road …

E. Guiding – Homework
- Rewrite the story in listening
- Prepare part Read

Week 24
Period 68

Preparing date: 10 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 13 - 02 – 2012
unit 11: traveling around viet nam

Lesson 4: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to get information about some places
of interest in Viet Nam by reading simple tourist advertisements.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Brainstorming

- Asks Ss some questions about Nha Trang, Da Lat, Sa pa and Ha Long Bay

Example:

Where is Nha Trang?

Have you ever been to Nha Trang?
What do you know about Nha Trang?...

- Introduces the lesson: today you are going to read some brochures about these places
of interest

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
place to live

= very big
translation
drawing
example
translation
explanation
situation

a person who sells flowers
>< export

Check: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces situation and pictures.
- Ss read the exercise 1 and predict (2’).
- T calls on 1 student to say his/her

prediction.

2. While-reading

- Ss read four advertisements and check
their prediction (4’).

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T asks one student to write on the
board.

- T asks Ss to say their answers.
- T corrects.

- T introduces the situation.

- Ss read each situation and answer.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
Lucky numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c Lk d b Lk a e Lk
3. Post-reading

- T guides.

- Do model dialogue with a good

student.

- Ss work in pairs (4’)
- T checks and corrects.

* Vocabulary

accommodation (n) : chỗ ở
giant (adj) : khæng lå
tribe (n) : bé téc

slope (n) : dốc núi, sờn núi
jungle (n) : rừng nhiệt đới
limestone (n) : đá vụi

mountain-climbing (n) : môn leo núi
sunbathe (v) : tắm n¾ng

florist (n) : ngêi b¸n hoa
import (v) : nhËp khÈu

1. Check (v) the topics mentioned in the
brochures about the resorts.

* Prediction
* Reading

Nha

Trang Da Lat SaPa Ha Long
Bay

caves

flights to Hanoi
hotels
local transport
mini-hotel
mountain slopes
railway
restaurants
sand beaches
tourists attractions
types of food
villages
waterfalls
World Heritage























2. Answer: Where should these people 
go?

a. Sa Pa
b. Nha Trang

c. Nha Trang Harbor
d. Ha Long Bay
e. Da Lat

3. Retell
Ex:

T: Where should Andrew go?
S: He should go to Sa Pa.
T: Why?

S: Because he studies tribes and he likes
mountain climbing.

E. Guiding - Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

Note: motel (n) : khách sạn (ở cạnh đờng lớn)
hostel (n) : nhà trọ, ký túc xá

- Prepare part: Write
Read the lesson before.

Week 24
Period 69

Preparing date: 13 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 16 - 02 – 2012
unit 11: traveling around viet nam

Lesson 5: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a narrative using a guided
composition.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

- Ask Ss some questions:
+ What is a narrative?

+ Have you ever written a narrative?

- asks Ss to study the definition of a narrative on the poster:

A narrative is a sequence of events. These events are usually written in the
chronological order and often lead to a climax. The first sentence of a narrative should
get the reader’s attention and the ending should be brief.

- explains some more about the definition in Vietnamese (tenses)

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn to write a narrative
II. New lesson

1. Pre-writing

- T elicits some new words.
translation

example
situation
situation
mime
translation

picture

explanation

mime
Checking: Matching

- T sets the scene: First of the story.
- Ss arrange the sentences individual.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ss look at the pictures, read given
words and find content of the story.
- Ss order the pictures.

- T checks and corrects.
- T says how to write a story.
2. While-writing

* Vocabulary

canoe (n): ca-n«, xuång

paddle (v) : chÌo thun b»ng dÇm
(n) : cái dầm

hire (v) : thuờ
overturn (v) : lt đổ
rescue (v) :cứu thoát, cứu
stumble (v) : trợt chân

go off (v) : đổ (chuông),
lean (v) : dựa vào

1. Put the sentences in the correct 
order.

c – a – g – d – f – b – e.

2. Order the events and write a story.
* Ordering

d – b – e – h – a – f – c – g.
* Write a story

- Use the Past Simple tense

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- Ask Ss to write each sentence to
complete the story.

- Ss work individual, then compare with
a partner.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ask some Ss to write their sentences on
the board.

- T corrects.

strangely …
* Story:

Uyen had a day to remember last week.
She had a math exam but she got up late.
She realized her alarm clock did not go
off. As she was leaving home, it started
to rain heavily. Uyen tried to run as fast
as she could. Suddenly she stumbled
against a rock and fell onto the road. Her
schoolbag went into a pool of water and
everything got wet. Strangely, the rain
stopped as she got to the classroom.
Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish
her exam.

3. Correction
E. Guiding - Homework

- Rewrite the story in notebook.

- Do exercise 9 on page 69 in workbook.
+ T says situation.

+ Ex: last year Class 11b had a terrible experience …
+ Note: explore (v) : thám hiểm, khảo sát.

Week 24
Period 70

Preparing date: 16 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 19 - 02 – 2012
unit 11: traveling around viet nam

Lesson 5: Language Focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do all the exercises using the
grammar of Ed and Ing” participles and Do/Would you mind...?

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- sets the scene: It’s time for recess and
the people at Quang Trung School are in
the school yard. What are they doing?
- elicits the target language:

T: Who is the man walking up the stairs?
- explains some more about the present
participle

- asks Ss to do the exercise
- gets feedback and corrects

- elicits the target language by aasking
the question below and has Ss repeat
- explains some more about the past
participle

- asks Ss to look at the picture, listen to
the questions and answer

- gives feedback and corrects

- asks Ss to write the sentences in their
exercise book

- gives instructions: work with a partner.
Use the wordcues to make and respond
to requests. A check means agree to the
request, a cross means disagree.

- gives an example:
- asks Ss to do the same
- gets feedback and corrects

- gives instructions: Work with a partner.
Look at the pictures.

- Ask questions and give suitable responses,
using Do/Would you mind if I....?

- gives a model:

- runs through all the pictures
- asks Ss to do the exercise
- gets feedback and corrects
4.Homework

- write all the exercises in your Ex-book

1. Present Participles: (V-ing)
Language Focus1

The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang.
(N) (present participle phrase)
Concept check

*Form: N + V-ing... (present participle)
*Use: a present participle can be used as
an adjective to qualify a noun with active
meaning

Answer key

+ The woman carrying a bag is Miss
Lien.

+ The boy standing next to Miss Lien is
Nam.

+ The boy sitting under the tree is Ba.
+ The girl standing by the table is Lan.
+ The girls playing chess are Nga and
Hoa.

2. Past participles: 
Language Focus2
Model sentences

T: How much is the old lamp made in China?
The old lamp made in China is five dollars.
N past participle phrase

Concept check

Form: N + V-ed/C2 (past participle)
Use: a past participle can be used as an
adjective to qualify a noun with passive
meaning

Question and Answer Drill

1. How much is the box painted green?
S: The box painted green is one dollar.
2. How much is the truck made from
drink cans?

3. How much is the doll dressed in pink?
4. How much are the flowers wrapped in
yellow paper?

5. How much are the toys kept in the
box?

3. Making requests: Do/Would you
mind...?

Language Focus3
Example:

a. move/ car

Would you mind moving your car?
No, of course not.

Language Focus4
*Modelsentences:

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

Week 24
Period 71

Preparing date: 13 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 16 - 02 – 2012
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review the main knowledge of the
units 9,10,11 for test 45’.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Pelmanism

see write make break do clean

seen written made broken done cleaned

II. New lesson
I. Language skills 
1. Listening

- runs through all the listening tasks in Units 9-11

+ Listening about what is happening in an emergency room
+ Listening about how to make compost

+ Listening to a conversation about positions on the map
- gives instructions about how to do these tasks

- says some notes for this item
2. Reading

- runs through all the reading texts in Units 9-11
+ a text about some first-aid treatments
+ an article about recycling

+ some brochures about some places of interest in Vietnam
- explains some more about how to do each type of reading tasks
3. Writing

- goes through all the writing tasks in Units 9-11
+ writing a thank-you note

+ writing instructions
+ writing a narrative

- explains some more about how to do each type of writing tasks
4. Speaking

- goes through all the speaking tasks in Units 9-11

+ making and responding to requests, offers and promises
+ speaking about classifying garbage for recycling

+ making and responding to requests using mind
- says some notes about these speaking tasks

II. Grammar (24’ )

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

+ Future Simple

+ Modal Will to make requests, offers and promises
+ Passive forms

+ Adjective followed by an infinitive/ a noun clause

+ -ed and -ing participles

+ requests with Would/Do you mind if...? and Would/Do you mind + V-ing?
Exercises: (workbook)

Ex6 (P57), Ex7 (P58), Ex5 (P61-62), Ex7-9 (P63-64), Ex3 (P66)
- gives instructions on how to do these exercises

- asks students to do the exercises
- asks students to call out the answers
- gives feedback and corrects

E. Homework

- write all the exercises in your exercise book
- revise for the test

Week 25
Period 72

Preparing date: 16 - 02- 2011 Teaching date: 19 - 02 – 2011
test 45’

A/ Objectives
Ss are able to:

- Listening: Listen to passage about recycling .
- Reading: Read a passage about Ha Long.
- Writing: Complete a letter, using given words.

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu

Vận dung

Cộng

Thấp Cao

TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL TNKQ TL
LISTENING Listen to a short recording aboutRecycling and do gap-filling

Số câu hỏi 8 8

Số điểm 2 2,0 ( 20 %)

READING Read a passage about a resort of Viet nam the answer the questions

Số câu hỏi 5 5

Số điểm 2.5 2.5 (25%)

VOCABULARY
+ GRAMMAR

Số câu hỏi 3 7 10

Số điểm 0.8 1.7 2.5 (25%)

PHONENTICS

Choose the word that has the
underlined part different from that

of the others

Số câu hỏi 4 4

Số điểm 1 1.0 (10%)

WRITING

Complete a
letter using
given words

Số câu hỏi 5 5

Số điểm 2.0 2,0 (20%)

TS câu hỏi 13 7 5 35

TS điểm 5,8 1.7 2.0 10

C. Content

Question 1: Listen then fill in each gap with the word you hear. (2p)

Recycling is easy. We can ... old car tires, bottles, ... ,waste paper
and drink cans for ... . Farmers have recycled their ... for thousands of
years. They grow ... for their animals and ...the dung for fertilizing their

fields. They also collect vegetable matter to make ... Finally, we can ...
things like envelopes, glass and plastic bottles.

Question 2: Read the following passage, then answer the questions. (3p)

Ha Long, Bay of the Descending Dragon, is very popular with both Vietnamese and
international tourists. One of the attractions of Ha Long is the Bay’s calm water and
limestone mountains. The Bay’s water is clear during the spring and early summer.
Upon arriving in Ha Long City, the visitors will go along Chay Beach. From the beach,
visitors can hire a boat and go out to the Bay. It is here that visitors will find some of
Southeast Asia’s most beautiful sites. Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at
Ha Long. Ha Long Bay was recognized by UNESCO as a World Heritage in 1994.

1. Is Ha Long Bay very popular with international tourists?
2. What is one of the attractions of Ha Long?

3. What will visitors do when they arrive in Ha Long City?
4. Can visitors go out to the Bay on a boat?

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

Question3: Circle the best option to complete each sentence. (3p)
1. Mary... to see us next week.

a. comes b. coming c. will come d. came

2. Vegetable matter...into compost.

a. makes b. is made c. is making d. ma

3. Empty milk bottles ...with milk.

a. refilled b. can refilled c. refill d. are refilled
4. ...you like a cup of coffee?

a. Would b. Will c. Can d. Shall

5. Lan often gets up early...get to school on time.

a. in order b. so to c. as to d. so as to

6. It is very difficult ...English.

a. to learn b. learn c. learning d. learnt

7. Would you mind if I ... the window?

a. close b. closing c. closed d. will close

8. Do you mind...me the way to the bus station?

a. to tell b. telling c. told d. tell

9. The man...with Miss Hoa is Mr Hung.

a. talking b. talk c. talked d. is talking

10. The mobile phone...in China is very cheap.

a. makes b. is made c. made d. making

Question 4: Complete the following letter using the prompts given below. (2p)

Dear Lan,

1. Thank you/ the postcard/ send/ me/ my birthday.
2. I/ feel/ happy/ when/ I / receive/ your postcard.
3. We/ go on/ picnic/ to Con Son/ this Sunday.
4. Would/ you/ like/ go/ us?

5. I/ phone/ you/ Saturday evening.
Love,

Tapescript

(The teacher reads the text twice)

Recycling is easy. We can collect old car tires, bottles, glass,waste paper and drink cans
for recycling. Farmers have recycled their waste for thousands of years. They grow food
for their animals and use the dung for fertilizing their fields. They also collect vegetable
matter to make compost. Finally, we can reuse things like envelopes, glass and plastic
bottles.

D.Answer key

Question1: (2p, 0.25p for each correct answer)
9. collect 5. food

10.glass 6. use
11. recycling 7. compost
12.waste 8. reuse 
Question2: (3p, 0.5p for each correct answer)

1. Yes, it is.

2. The Bay’s calm water and limestone mountains (is one of...)
3. They will go along Chay Beach.

4. Yes, they can.

5. Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long.
6. Ha Long Bay was recognized as a World Heritage in 1994.
Question3: (3p, 0.3p for each correct answer)

1- c 2- b 3- d 4- a 5- d

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

Question4: (2p, 0.4p for each correct answer)

1. Thank you for the postcard you sent me on my birthday.
2. I felt happy when I received your postcard.

3. We will go on a picnic to Con Son (on) this Sunday.
4. Would you like to go with us?

5. I will phone you on Saturday evening
E. Guiding homework

- Redo the test.
Week 24

Period 73

Preparing date: 22 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 26 - 02 - 2012

unit 12: A Vacation Abroad

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to be aware of how to make, accept
and decline invitations.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape, picture
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in
book.

- One S says the requirement.
- T does model part a).

- Ss work in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement and
asks Ss to make dialogues.

- Ss work in pairs.

- T calls some pairs to say aloud.
- T corrects.

II. Listen and read

- T elicits some new words.
translation

situation
example
in a foreign country

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the dialogue.

- Ss listen to tape 2 times.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in
pairs.

- Ask some pairs to read.
- T listens and corrects.

- T introduces the exercise and asks
Ss to complete the table.

- T asks some Ss to complete the
table on the board.

- T corrects.

- T runs through the questions.
- Ss read the dialogue again and ask
and answer the questions in pairs.

I. Getting started
1. Matching

a. The United States of America
b. Australia

c. Thailand
d. Britain
e. Canada
f. Japan

2. Making dialogues

S1: Which country do you want to visit?
S2: I’d like to visit ...

S1: Why?

S2: Because ...
II. Listen and read
* Vocabulary

include (v) : bao gåm, kÓ cả
(to) come over : ghé thăm

(to) pick someone up : đón, rớc ai đó
abroad (adv) : ở nớc ngồi

1. Complete Mrs Quyen’s schedule.

DATE Monday

25 Tuesday26 Wednesday27 Thursday28
SCHEDULE Coming

to San
Francisco

Going

out Having dinner with
the Smiths

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again
and find the statements which
indicate the situations:

1. Invitation

2. Accepting invitation
3. Declining an invitation
4. A complaint

2. Answer the following questions.

a. No, they won’t. Because they are coming on a
town, and their accommodation is included in the
ticket price, so they will stay at the hotel.

b. No, they won’t. Because he will have a
business meeting in the evening that day.
c. Mrs. Smith will pick her up at the hotel.
3. Grammar

(1) Invitation

- Would you like to come and stay with us?
- You must come over for dinner one night.
(2) Accepting an invitation

- Yes, we’d love to but we’ll only be in town for
three nights.

(3) Declining an invitation

That’s very kind of you but we’re coming on a
town.

(4) A complaint

Oh, dear. He’s always working.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heat the new words.

- Read the dialogue again and translate it.
- Do exercise 1 on page 70 in exercise book.
Find mistakes and correct.

Ex: accommodation
- Prepare: Speak + Listen
Read the lesson before.

Week 25

Period 74

Preparing date: 24 -02 - 2012 Teaching date: 27 -02– 2012
correcting the test

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to find out what they learn well as what they
didn't learn well. Depend on the result of the written test, Ss will continue their methods
and skills to revise the old knowledge and remember it. they able to learn new

knowledge better.

B/ Language content:

- The skills of listening, reading, writing

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

E. Correcting the test

I/ Warm up Chatting
1. Is the test difficult or easy?

2. How many exercises are there in the test?
3. Which exercise easy/ difficult?

4. How many marks do you think you will get?
1. Good aspect: Listening, reading,

2. Bad aspect : grammar and writing

+ Ss get good marks: Hung, Ng. Huyen, Xuan,

+ Ss get bad marks : Ninh, Duc, Tuan, Quynh, Nhanh, P.Huyen, Khai, Hoang...

3. Comment mistakes Correcting/ methods

3.1 Listening
3.2 Reading

3.3 Language focus
3.4 Writing

Question 1: don't remember vocabulary:
waste, revycle,

+ the word kind: use not you; food not put...
Question 2:

4 -> Yes/No question
Question 3:

2,3,10 : passive sentences
6. Adj + to infinitive
Question 4:

Grammar:

1,2 : past simple tense
3: near future

4 : invitation
5: future simple
4. Point and key

Question1: (2p, 0.25p for each correct answer)
13.collect 5. food

14.glass 6. use
15.recycling 7. compost
16.waste 8. reuse 
Question2: (3p, 0.5p for each correct answer)

7. Yes, it is.

8. The Bay’s calm water and limestone mountains (is one of...)

9. They will go along Chay Beach.

10.Yes, they can.

11. Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long.
12.Ha Long Bay was recognized as a World Heritage in 1994.
Question3: (3p, 0.3p for each correct answer)

1- c 2- b 3- d 4- a 5- d

6- a 7- c 8- b 9- a 10- c

Question4: (2p, 0.4p for each correct answer)

1. Thank you for the postcard you sent me on my birthday.
2. I felt happy when I received your postcard.

3. We will go on a picnic to Con Son (on) this Sunday.
4. Would you like to go with us?

5. I will phone you on Saturday evening

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Redo the test.

- Prepare part: Speak + Listen
Read the lesson before.

Week 25
Period 75

Preparing date: 25 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 29 - 02 - 2012
unit 12: A Vacation Abroad

Lesson 2: Speak 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about their plans for a trip
abroad and listen to the weather forecast for information about the weather in big cities
in the world.

* Voc: itinerary, gallery, flight, via, brochure

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Chatting
- asks Ss some questions:

+ Have you ever been abroad?

+ If you have a vacation abroad, where will you go? Why ?
+ What do you know about Los Angeles?

- Introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn to make plans for a trip abroad and
listen about the weather.

II. New lesson
1. Presentation

- T elicits some new words.
picture

explanation
situation
translation
realia

- T sets the scene: These people are
making a plan for their trip from Los
Angeles to Boston. Let’s do it with
them.

I. Speak
* Vocabulary

itinerary (n) : lé tr×nh

gallery (n) : triĨn l·m nghƯ tht
flight (n) : chun bay

via (n) : theo đờng, qua
brochure (n) : tờ rơi

1. Complete the itinerary.
Example:

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

- T introduces the itinerary, brochure
and flight information.

- Ss read and complete the itinerary
in pairs.

- T does maodel dialogue with a
good student.

2. Practice

- Ss make dialogues in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- Ask some pairs to practice aloud.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Production

-Ask Ss to make the dialogues about
themselves

Arrive Boston: At 4.00

Accommodation: Atlantic Hotel

Sightseeing: Boston University, Museum
 and Art galleries

Depart Boston: Flight 710 at 10.00 on
 Thursday, 22

2. Making dialogues
Ex:

T: What time should we leave Los Angeles?
S: There’s a flight 835 at 10 am, would that
be OK?

T: OK. What time will we arrive at Boston?
S: We will arrive at 4 pm.

T: Where should we stay?

S: Atlantic Hotel. Because it is cheap.
T: Where should we visit?

S: I think we should visit Boston University,
Museum and Art gallery.

T: When should we depart Boston?

S: There’s a flight 710 at 10.00 on Thursday,
22.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Do exercise 5 on 73.

Study the situation and make dialogues.

Week 25
Period 76

Preparing date: 27 - 02 - 2012 Teaching date: 01 - 03 - 2012
unit 12: A Vacation Abroad

Lesson 2: Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listen to the weather forecast for
information about the weather in big cities in the world.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up 
* Checking old lesson:

-Call on two pairs go to board and make conversations about their plan for nextsummer
vacation basing on part Speak

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- asks Ss some questions:

+ Doyou like Weather forcast program?
+ Do you often listen to the weather forcast?
+ How is it introduced?

- Introduces the lesson: Today you are going to learn to make plans for a trip abroad and
listen about the weather.

II. New lesson

1. Pre-listening
- present newwords.

- Checking by Brainstorming

- writes the topic on the board and
asks Ss to go to the board to write the
words related to the topic

- gives feedback and corrects

- sets the scene: You are going to
listen to the weather forecast about
the weather in Sydney/ Tokyo/
London/ Bangkok/ New York/ Paris.
But first, you guess and fill in the
table.

- runs through the table

- asks Ss to guess the missing
information

- gets feedback and writes some
guesses on the board

- gets students to listen to the tape
twice and check their predictions.
- gets Ss to compare their answers
- asks Ss to listen again to correct

their answers

- gets feedback and corrects
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape and complete the
table.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- Ss listen again and check.
3. Post-speaking/ listening
 - gets Ss to ask and answer the 
questions about the weather and
temperature using the information in
the table

Vocabulary

- windy (adj) (explanation): có gió
- humid (adj)(trans): ẩm
- 2 degrees = 20C 
- temperature (example): nhiệt độ
- a low (trans): nhiệt độ thấp(nhất)
- cloudy (adj)(e.g): có nhiều mây

Brainstorming

fine wet cool cold
high

warm
rainy

windy dry hot humid
low

* Open Prediction

5. While- listening
 Answer key

City Weather Temperature

Low High
1.Sydney
2. Tokyo
3.London
4.Bangkok
5.New
York
6. Paris
dry, windy
dry, windy
humid, cold
warm, dry
windy, 
cloudy
cool, dry
20

15
-3
24
8
10
26
22
7
32
15
16

* Roleplay 
Example:

T: What’s the weather like in Sydney today?
S: It will be dry and windy

T: How about the temperature?

S: The low will be 200 C and the high will be
26 degrees.

- asks Ss to practice the same

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

before the class

- gives feedback and corrects

Week 26

Period 77

Preparing date: 02 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 05 - 03 – 2012
unit 12: A Vacation Abroad

Lesson 3: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to obtain some knowledge about
some scenic sports in the USA.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up: Chatting

- hangs the pictures of some places of interest in the USA
- asks Ss some questions

+ What do you know about these pictures?
+ What is it? What’s its name?

+ Where is it?

T: They are all places of interest

- introduces the lesson: Today you are going to read about some places of interest in the
USA

II. New lesson
1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.

translation

example
situation

Checking: Rub out and remember

- sets the scene: As you know, Mrs
Quyen and her husband went on a
vacation to the USA. They visited lots of
famous places of interest. Look at the
pictures and guess which places they
visited.

- gets feedback and writes some guesses
on the board

3- T introduces the situation and asks Ss 
to predict.

- T checks 2 Ss.

* Vocabulary

volcano (n) : nói lưa

lava (n) : dung nham, nham thạch
(to) pour out: phun trào, đổ ra

carve (v) : chạm khắc
(to) be situated : đợc đặt

wharf (n) : cầu tầu, cầu cảng
overhead (adv) : phía trên ®Çu

1. Complete what Mrs Quyen did and 
saw in each of these places.

* Prediction

* Reading

Places What she did and saw
a. Hawaii

b. New
York
c. Chicago
d. Mount
Rushmore
e. San

Went swimming, visited

Kilauea Volcano

Went shopping, bought lots of
souvenirs

Saw Lake Michigan

Saw the heads of 4 American
Presidents

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

2. While-reading

- Ask Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.

- Ss work individual. (5’)
- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks some Ss and corrects.

- T introduces the questions.

- Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.

3. Post-reading

- T gives some questions and asks Ss to
base on to retell about their trips.

- T asks some Ss to say aloud before
the .class.

- T listens and checks.

Francisco Napa Valley wine growing area
and the Alcatraz Prison

2. Answer the following questions
a. She went there by plane.

b. She saw the famous prison on the
island of Alcatraz.

c. It is the mount where the heads of four
American Presidents are carved into the
rock, and it can be seen from more than
100 km away.

d. It is also called “The windy City”.
e. She went shopping.

3. Retell about your trip to another 
province.

- Where did you visit?
- Who did you go with?
- What did you visit?
- How did you go there?

- How long did you stay there?

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercises 1,2 on page 7o in workbook.

+ Exercise 1: Underline and rewrite the misspelt words.
Ex: a. accommodation

+ Exercise 2: Underline and rewrite the inappropriate words.
Ex: a. painted (x) - > carved (v)

- Prepare part: write
Read the lesson before.

Week 26
Period 78

Preparing date: 04 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 07 - 03 - 2012
unit 12: A Vacation Abroad

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write their friends about their trip.
B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up: Lucky numbers

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

1. Where did Mrs Quyen and her husband spend their holiday? (in the USA)
2. Lucky number

3. What did they see on Mount Rushmore? (the heads of four ...)
4. Who did they visit when they were in the USA? (the Smiths)
5. Lucky number

6. What did Mrs Quyen do while her husband was visiting the Statue of Liberty? (she
went shopping)

7. Lucky number

8. What did Mrs Quyen buy? (lots of souvenirs)

9. What did she send to her children from the USA? (postcards)
10. Lucky number

- introduces the lesson: Have you ever written a postcard? Today you are going to learn
how to write a postcard

II. New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T sets the scene: From the USA, Mrs.
Quyen sent a postcard to her friend,

Sally to tell her about the trip.

- Ask Ss to look at the postcard and
complete the gaps with appropriate
words.

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T checks and corrects.

- T sets the scene: Imagine you are a
tourist on vacation in a certain place/
city in Vietnam.

- Ask Ss to read the information in
exercise 2.

- T introduces the table and asks Ss to
complete it.

- Ss work individual.

- T asks one student to complete the
table on the board.

- T corrects.
2. While-writing

- Ask Ss look at their table and base on
the postcard in part 1 to write a postcard
to a friend about their trip.

- Ss work individual in 7 minutes.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare their postcards.
- T corrects some postcards.

1. Complete the postcard Mrs Quyen 
sent from the USA.

(1) in (6) nice/lovely
(2) people (7) bought
(3) weather (8) for

(4) visited (9) heaviness
(5) her (10) soon
2. Complete the table

Necessary information 
for a postcard

Your 
information
Place

How you feel about the

people.

Weather

Who you meet/ see.
What you see
What you buy

3. Write a postcard
Ex:

Dear Lan,

We are having time in ...The people
hare are ...and the weather is ...
In ..., I met ... I visited many
places, such as ...I also bought ...
They are beautiful/ interesting ....
See you later/ again.

Love,
Hoa

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

E. Guiding – Homework

- Continue to write your postcard.

- Do exercise 7 on page 75 in workbook.
T introduces the situation.

Note: narrow (adj) : chật, hẹp
stuff (n) : món ăn
lantern (n) : đèn lồng
- Prepare part: Language focus
Read the lesson before.

Week 26
Period 79

Preparing date: 05 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 08 - 03 - 2012
unit 12: A Vacation Abroad

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about activities using the
Present and Past Progressive tenses.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up: Check old lesson

S1: Write his/her postcard on the board.
S2: Do exercise 7 on page 75 on the board.
* Key:

b. narrow f. souvenirs

c. town g. friendly
d. walk h. tastes
e. old i. bought
j. colorful

II. New lesson

- T introduces the requirement and the
pictures.

- Ss look at the picture a and answer the
question “What was Ba doing at eight
o’clock last night?”

- Ss write the sentence on the board.
- Ss say form of verb and its use.
- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy.

- Ss look at the other pictures and say

1. Say what each person was doing at 
eight o’clock last night.

* Model sentences

a) Ba was taking a shower at eight
o’clock last night.

- Past Progressive tense:

Form: was/were + V-ing

Use: to indicate an action that was
happening at a point of time in the past.
* Sentences

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

the actions in the pictures.

- Ss say what each person was doing at
eight o’clock last night.

- T corrects.

- T introduces and guides.

- Ss look at the picture a) and read the
example.

- T writes the sentence on the board.
- Ss say form of the verbs.

- T says the use of the tense.
- Ss copy.

- Ss look at the pictures and match each
sentence.

- Ss read the sentences aloud.
- T corrects.

- T introduces the picture a) and
example.

- Ss say the tense of verb “forget”.
- When do we use it?

- Ss look at the pictures and make
sentences individual.

- T checks and corrects.

c. Bao was reading a comic at eight
o’clock last night.

d. Nga was writing a letter at eight
o’clock last night.

e. Na was walking with her dog at eight
o’clock last night.

f. Lan was talking to her grandmother at
eight o’clock last night.

2. Matching
* Model sentence

a- C: The Le family was sleeping when
Past Progressive
the mailman came.

Past Simple
* Past Progressive tense

Use: The tense is also used to express an
action which was happening in the past
when another action took place.

Connectives: when, while

* Key: b- F, c- E, d- B, e- D, f- A.
3. Say what the people are always 
doing.

Example:

a. Bao is always forgetting his

homework.
* Present Progressive tense with

“always”

- Form: am/ is/ are + V-ing
- Use : to express a complaint
b. Mrs. Nga is always losing her
umbrella.

c. Mr. and Mrs. Thanh are always
missing their bus.

d. Nam is always watching TV.
e. Na is always talking on the phone.
f. Liem is always going out.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Do the exercises in notebook again.

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

Week 27
Period 80

Preparing date: 09 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 12 - 03 - 2012
unit 13: Festivals

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will understand the details of the dialogue about
traditional festivals.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape, picture.
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

- T introduces the requirements.
- T does model with a good student.
- Ss ask and answer in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

II. New lesson

- T elicits some new words.
example
explanation
= shout aloud

translation
= take part in

mime
situation

realia

Check: Rub out and remember

- T sets the scene: Ba invites his friend
Liz to a traditional festival in the North
of Vietnam.

- T gives 2 questions.

- Ask Ss to close the book and listen to
tape and answer the questions.

- T checks 2 Ss.

* Key: a. It is a rice-cooking festival.
b. They enter 3 competitions.
- Ss open their book and listen to tape
again.

- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T calls on some pairs to read the
dialogue aloud.

- T listens and corrects.
- T introduces the exercise.
- Ss read the sentences.

- Ss read the dialogue again and do the
exercises in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.
- T explains the grammar.
- Ss read and copy.

- Ss read and find passive sentences in

I. Getting started
Work with a partner.
Example:

T: Where should Tom go?

S: He should go to Ha Long Bay.
T: Why?

S: Because there are quiet sand beaches
there.

II. Listen and read
* Vocabulary

competition (n) : cuéc tranh tµi
fetch (v) : ®i lÊy, mang vỊ
yell (v) : hÐt to, la to
urge (v) : thóc giơc
participate (v) : tham gia
separate (v) : t¸ch rêi
judge (n) : träng tµi
husk (n) : vá trÊu
1. Comprehension questions.
a. What festival is it?

b. How many competitions do people
enter in the festival?

2. Practice the dialogue.

3. True or False?

a. F b. F c. T
d. F e. F f. T
* Correction

a. Two team members -> Only one team

member

b. four -> one
d. wood -> bamboo

e. team members -> judge
4. Grammar

a. Compound words

a rice-cooking festival
a water-fetching competition
a fire-matching competition
compound adj noun
b. Passive Form

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

the dialogue.

- Ask Ss to work in small groups to talk
about a festival they know.

- T checks and corrects.

be+ PII

5. Talk about a festival you know

E. Guiding _ Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Read the dialogue again.
- Do exercise 5 on page 80.

Find verbs in the dialogue to complete the sentences.
Ex: a. explain

- Prepare part: Speak + Listen

Week 27
Period 81

Preparing date: 11 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 14 - 03 - 2012
unit 13: Festivals

Lesson 2: Speak
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about their preparations for a
special event

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape.

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Checking old lesson

- Call 2 sts to read the dialogue in “Listen and read” then translate it into Vietnamese
II. New lesson

1. Presentation

- T elicits some new words.
translation

I. Speak
* Vocabulary

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

situation
drawing
realia
example

Checking: Rub out and Remember

- T sets the scene: Mrs. Quyen is talking
to Lan about their preparations for Tet.
Put the sentences in the correct order.
- Ss read and reorder the dialogue in
pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- T calls on some pairs to read the
dialogue aloud.

2. Practice

- T introduces the names of festivals.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs of groups to

make dialogues, base on the dialogue
between Lan and her mother.

- T gives Ss some guiding words and
structures if necessary.

- T guides some questions.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.
3. Production

- Ask Ss to talk about their preparations.
- T checks 2 Ss and corrects.

peach blossoms (n) : hoa đào
marigold (n) : cúc vạn thọ

dried watermelon seed (n) : h¹t da khô
spring roll (n) :bánh đa nem

1. Ordering the dialogue
Mrs. Quyen Lan
A F
C H
D J
B G
E I

2. Make up your own dialogues.
G1: a village festival

G2: a school festival
G3: a spring festival
G4: a harvest festival
G5: a flower festival
Example question:

- What will we do to prepare for ....?
- Should we make some cakes?
- What should we buy?

...

3. Talk about your preparations for the 
festival.

Ex:

We will prepare many things for ... We
will buy ... We will make ... We will
do ....

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 7 on page 82 in workbook.

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Week 27
Period 82

Preparing date: 12 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 15 - 03 - 2012
unit 13: Festivals

Lesson 2: Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to improve their listening skill by
listening to the dialogue for details.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape.

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Chatting
- T asks some Ss:

What do you often prepare for Tet?
- Ss answer one by one.

II. New lesson

- T elicits some new words.
situation

drawing
realia
example

Checking: Rub out and Remember

- T sets the scene: The Robinson family
is making preparations for Tet. They
want to buy things to make it a

traditional festival as Vietnamese people
do.

- Ss read the sentences and guess words
to fill.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-listening

- Ask Ss to listen to tape and check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

I. Speak
* Vocabulary

peach blossoms (n) : hoa đào
marigold (n) : cúc vn th

dried watermelon seed (n) : hạt da khô
spring roll (n) :bánh đa nem

II. Listen

1. Listen and fill in the gaps.
* Guessing

* Listening

a. Mr. Robinson , flower market
b. traditional

c. dried watermelon seeds
d. make spring rolls

2. Complete the notes.

Things to do

Mr. Robinson Go to the flower market to
buy peach blossom and a
bunch of marigolds.

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

- Ask Ss to copy the grid and fill in the
gaps with the information taken from the
statements above.

- T calls on Ss to say.
- T listens and corrects.

candies and apacket of
dried watermelon seeds.
Mrs. Robinson go to Mrs. Nga’s to learn

how to make spring rolls.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 7 on page 82 in workbook.

Read the passage and complete it with given words.
- Prepare part: Read

Find information about Christmas.

Week 28
Period 83

Preparing date: 16 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 19 - 03 - 2012
unit 13: Festivals

Lesson 3: Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to get some knowledge about
Christmas.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Brainstorming

Christmas tree
II. New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
explanation

realia
example
translation

* Vocabulary

spread (n): lan truyÒn
card (n) : thiÕp
century (n) : thÕ kû
design (v) : thiÕt kÕ

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

situation
translation

= happy
situation

Checking: Rub out and Remember

- T introduces: Christmas is an important
festival in many countries around the
world.

- Ss copy the table and predict.
- T checks some Ss.

2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and check their
prediction.

- Ss complete the table individual. (5’)
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the questions.
- Ss read them.

- T explains difficult questions if
necessary.

- Ss ask and answer in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-reading

- Ss discuss in small groups the
questions.

- Ask them to talk about their ideas.

carol (n) : bài thánh ca
patron saint (n) : thánh bảo hộ
jolly (adj) : vui vỴ

professor (n) : giáo đồ
1. Complete the table.

* Prediction
Christmas

Specials place oforigin Date
Riga

mid-19th
century
Christmas

Carol

USA

* Reading

Christmas
Specials

Place of
origin

Date
The Christmas

Tree Riga early 1500s

The Christmas
Card

England mid-19th
century
Christmas

Carol no information 800 years ago

Santa Claus USA 1823

2. Answer the questions.

a) The Christmas tree came to the USA
more than a century ago.

b) Because he wanted to send Christmas
greetings to his friends.

c) Christmas songs were first performed
800 years ago.

d) An American professor named
Clement Clarke Moore wrote the poem.
e) Santa Claus is based on the

description of Saint Nicholas in
professor Moore’s poem.

3. Discussion

- What do you often do at Christmas?
- What do you want to do at Christmas?

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 8 on page 82 in workbook.

Fill in the gaps in the passage with given words.
Ex: (1) festival

- Prepare part: Write

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Week 28
Period 84

Preparing date: 18 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 21 - 03 - 2012
unit 13: Festivals

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a report on a festival they
have joined.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, pictures

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Memory game

- T shows the picture in book and asks Ss to observe it carefully.
- Let Ss to look at the picture for about 20” and put it away.
- Ask Ss to answer the questions:

1. How many people are there in the picture? What are they doing?
2. Name all the things in the picture.

* Answer:

1. There are 7 people in the picture. They are participating in the rice-cooking
competition.

2. Things are rice, basket, pans, bamboo sticks, paper fan, chopsticks and a flag.
II. New lesson

1. Pre-writing

- T introduces the exercise.

- Ss look at the picture and read the
report.

- T explains difficult words if necessary.
- Ss find words to complete the report.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
- T introduces the questions.

- Ss read the questions. T explains if
necessary.

- Ss copy the table.

- Ask Ss to remember a festival they
joined and complete the table.

- T calls on some Ss to answer.

1. Fill in the gaps in this report.
Example: (1) rice-cooking
Key:

(2) one / a (6) traditional
(3) water-fetching (7) bamboo
(4) run (8) six

(5) water (9) separate
(10) added

2. Complete the table

Necessary information
for a report

Festival information
you joined

Name of festival
Where it was held
How long it lasted
How many activities
How they were
organized

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

2. While-writing

- Ask Ss to write a report in small
groups. (10’)

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T writes down Ss’ mistakes.

3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare their reports.

- T corrects some reports on the board.

took part in

What you thought

3. Write a report
Guided festivals:

a village festival
a school festival
* Tense:

We can use past simple tense or present
simple tense.

* Connectives: after, before, finally ...
4. Correction

E. Guiding – Homework

- Rewrite your reports.

- Do exercise 9 on page 83 in workbook.
Make sentences.

Example: a) She said she enjoyed food in the festival.
- Prepare part: Language focus

Do exercises before.

Week 28
Period 85

Preparing date: 19 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 22 - 03 - 2012
unit 13: Festivals

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use reported speech, compound
words and the passive in the past present and future tenses.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Pelmanism
Infinitive – Past Participle

put write hold make break decorate

put written held made broken decorated

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

- Ask Ss to say form of passive in tenses.
- Ss write on the board.

- T corrects.

- T introduces the exercise.
- Ss read the given verbs.
- T does model part a.

- Ss work individual, then compare with
a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the picture and situation.
- Ss read the given words.

- Ss complete the dialogue.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss say form of the passive in the
Present Perfect.

- T introduces the example.

- Ss find form of compound adjective.
- T corrects.

- T does model part a.

- Ss work in pairs to rewrite each
sentence.

- T checks and corrects.

- T sets the scene: in book.
- T explains the example.
- Ss find structure.

- T corrects.

- Ss report the sentences.

- T asks Ss to write on the board.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Complete the sentences.
* Revision: Passive Form

Present Simple: am/is/ are + PII
Past Simple: were / was + PII
Future Simple : will + be + PII
* Key:

a. were performed

b. was decorated ... put
c. is made

d. will be held
e. was awarded
f. was written

2. Complete the conversation.
(1) jumbled

(2) broken
(3) broken
(4) scattered
(5) pulled

Present Perfect : have/ has + PII
3. Rewrite the sentences.

Example:

It is a contest in which participants have
to cook rice.

=> It’s a rice-cooking contest.
Compound adjective:

noun-Ving + Noun
adjective

a. It is a fire-making contest.
b. It is a bull-fighting festival.
c. The United States has a big
car-making industry.

d. Last week Tran Hung Dao held
flower-arranging contest.

e. Viet Nam is a rice-exporting country.
f. This is a clothes-washing machine.
4. Report what the man told Mrs. Thu.
Example:

a. “I’m a plumber.”

-> He said he was a plumber.
* Reported speech

S1+ said +S2+V(past simple) + ...
* Note:

- Pronouns: depend on the subject of the
main clause.

- Some changes:

this -> that, now -> then, must-> had to
b. He said he could fix the faucets.
c. He said the pipes were broken.
d. He said the pipes were very

expensive.

e. He said she had to pay him then.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Do the exercise again in notebook.

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Read the lesson before.

Week 29
Period 86

Preparing date: 23 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 26 - 03 - 2012
unit 14: wonders of the world

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to seek information about a language
game to complete a summary.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, picture, cassette, tape
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
D/ Procedures:

Test 15’

I. Write forms of passive in tenses: present simple, past simple, future simple, present 
perfect.(4 marks)

II. Write correct tenses of the verbs in brackets.(6 marks)
1. The room (clean) every day.

2. The letter (write) yesterday.
3. The festival (hold) next month.

Answer and Marks
I. (4 marks) each correct tense is 1 mark.

- Present Simple: am/is /are + PII
- Past Simple: was/were + PII
- Future Simple: will be + PII
- Present Perfect: have/ has + PII

II. (6 marks) each correct verb is 2 marks

1. is cleaned 2. was written 3. will be held
I. Warm up

- T introduces the topic of the unit.
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures and
match them with correct names.
- T checks and corrects.

- T gives Ss some information about the
famous places.

- T elicits some new words.
picture

picture
translation

situation

- T sets the scene: Nga, Nhi and Hoa are
playing a game. Listen and answer the

I. Getting started
Matching

a. The Pyramids

b. Sydney Opera House
c. Stonehenge

II. Listen and read
* Vocabulary

Golden Gate Bridge (n): Cầu Cổng Vàng
Statue of Liberty (n) : Tợng Nữ Thần
Tự Do

clue (n) : đầu mối
rule (n) : luật lệ

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

question.

- Ss listen to tape (2 times)
- Ask Ss to answer the question.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.(5’)
- T checks some pairs and corrects.
- Ss say how to play the guessing game.
- T listens and corrects.

- T shows the exercise.

- Ss read it and read the dialogue again.
- Ss find correct words to complete the
summary.

- T checks and corrects.

- T explains the model sentence.
- Ss copy.

- Ss play guessing game.

- Call one student to go to the board and
think of a famous play. The others guess
it by ask him/her yes/no questions.

2. How to play a guessing game

3. Complete the summary
(1) game

(2) place
(3) clue

(4) Vietnam
(5) America
(6) Golden
(7) right
(8) was

4. Model sentence

I don’t know how to play it.
= I don’t know how I can play it.

-> reduced form of an indirect question.
5. Guessing game

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Read the dialogue again.

- Do exercise 6 on page 87 in work book

Complete the sentences, using question word + to infinitive
Ex: I don’t know where to go.

- Prepare part: Speak + Listen
Read the lesson before.
Week 29

Period 87

Preparing date: 25 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 28 - 03 - 2012
unit 14: wonders of the world

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to make a report on famous places
using reported speech and recognize mistakes by listening to an advertisement.
B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Game: Who is the fastest?
- Ss work in groups of 3,4 Ss.

- Write 10 famous world places within 3 minutes.
- T gathers the posters, checks then gives marks.
- Who finishes first is winner.

II. New lesson

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

- T introduces the requirement and
example.

- T introduces some famous places in the
box.

- Ss write Yes/ No questions for 10
famous places.

- Ss work individual. (4’)
2. Practice

- Ss ask and answer in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.

- T sets the scene.

- T asks one good student.

- T writes sentences on the board.
- What do they mean?

- Compare them with structure of
Yes/No question.

- Ss say form of reported sentence.
- T corrects

3. Post-reading

- Ask Ss to report their dialogues.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Pre-listening

- T elicits some new words.
example
= small hotel

translation
realia
translation

Checking: Rub put and remember
- T introduces picture and situation.
- T asks Ss to predict four mistakes.
- T checks 2 Ss.

2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape 2 times and check.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to read the text again and copy
the text into notebook.

- T checks and corrects.

Example:

T: Have you visited Hue Citadel?
S: No, I haven’t.

T: Is Big Ben in England?
S: Yes, it is.

* Some guiding questions:

- Have they built the Eiffel Tower in
Paris? (Yes)

- Is the Empire State Building located in
New York City? (Yes)

- Is Mount Everest in England? (No, it is
in Nepal)

- Are the Petronas Twin Towers
located in America? (No, it is in
Malaysia)

b) Talk about your classmates answers’
with your partner.

* Grammar drill

T: Is Phong Nha cave in Southern
Vietnam?

S: No, it isn’t.

T: Is Petronas Twin Towers in Malaysia

the highest building in the world?

S: Yes, it is.

* Model sentences

- I asked Hoa if Phong Nha cave was in
Southern Vietnam. She said that it was.
- I asked Hoa whether Petronas Twin
Towers in Malaysia was the highest
building in the world. She said that it
was.

* Form:

Reported Yes/ No question

S1+asked +O+if/ whether+S2+ V(past)...
* Note:

- Change tense of verb: Present Simple to
Past Simple

- Yes/ No question into statement
II. Listen

* Vocabulary

jungle (n) : rừng rậm nhiệt đới
inn (n) : khách sạn nhỏ

crystal-clear (adj):trong suèt(nh pha lª)
coral (n) : san h«

snorkel (v) : bơi lặn có sử dụng ống thở
* Correct four mistakes

1. Prediction
2. Listening

(1) southern - > far north
(2) inn -> hotel
(3) jungle -> rainforest
(4) 6824 3927 -> 3924 3927
3. Reading and writing

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

Write reported sentences. Ex: The tourist asks Lan if Phong Nha was in Quang Binh
province.

Week 29
Period 88

Preparing date: 26 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 29 - 03 - 2012
unit 14: wonders of the world

Lesson 3: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to get some knowledge about the
wonders of the world.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, picture

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Chatting
- Name wonders of the world you know.

- What do you know them? (history, where, ...)
II. New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
translation

example
situation
example
translation

example
situation

realia
Checking: Matching

- T introduces the text: You are reading a
text about list of seven wonders of the
world.

- T hangs the picture on the board and
introduces some wonders on the world.
- Ask Ss to read the sentences of the
exercise and guess best answers.
- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks 2 Ss.

2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and check their
prediction. (3’)

- Ss work individually, and then compare
with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
- T asks Ss some questions:

a) What is in the first list of seven
wonders of the world?

* Vocabulary

compile (v) : biên soạn, tập hợp
claim (v) : khẳng định tuyên bố
god (n) : vị thần

honor (n) : t«n kÝnh

religious (adj) : thuộc về tôn giáo
royal (adj) : thuộc về hoàng gia
Buddhist (n) : đạo Phật

list (n) : danh s¸ch
1. Complete the sentences

* Prediction * Reading
a) C
b) A
c) D
d) B

2. Answer questions

a) They are the Hanging Gardens of
Babylon in present-day Iraq, the Statue
Of Zeus in Greece, and the Pyramid of
Cheops in Egypt.

b) It is Angkor Wat.

c) He moved to Phnom Penh in the early
15th century.

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

b) What is the largest temple in the
world?

c) When did the Khmer rulers move to
Phnom Penh?

3. Post-reading

- T draws the grid on the board and asks
Ss to complete it.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T asks Ss to complete the grid on the
board.

- T corrects.

Wonders of the world Country
1. Hanging gardens of

Babylon

2. Statue of Zeus

3. The Pyramid of Cheops
4. The Great Wall

5. Taj Mahal

6. Angkor Wat

Iraq
Greece
Egypt
China
India
Cambodi
a

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 1 on page 84 in workbook.
Make passive sentences.

Example:

a) Aspirin was discovered by Dresser in 1889.
- Prepare part: Write

Read the lesson before.

Week 30
Period 89

Preparing date: 30 - 03 - 2012 Teaching date: 02 - 04 - 2012
unit 14: wonders of the world

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a letter to a friend about a
place they have visited.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, picture

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Guessing Game

- Ask Ss to think of one of the wonders of the world and write it on a piece of paper.
- Call on a student to the front of the class with his/ her paper.

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

II. New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T elicits some new words.
translation

situation
translation
= very exciting

situation
example

translation

Checking: Rub out and Remember

- Ask Ss to read the letter tim sent to Hoa
about his trip to the Grand Canyon.
- Ask Ss to complete the letter inserting
the letters of the missing sentences.
- T explains the example.

- Ss work individual, then work in pairs.
( 1,5’)

- T checks and corrects.
2. While-writing

- T sets the scene: Imagine you have
visited a place recently. Write a letter to
a friend of yours and tell him/her about
this place.

- Ask Ss to read the outline.

- T shows the table and asks Ss to copy
it.

- Ss imagine and complete the column
“Your information”.

- T checks some Ss.

- Ask Ss to write the letter individual.
(10’)

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T writes down Ss’ typical mistakes.
3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare their letters with their
partners.

- T calls on some Ss to read their letters
aloud.

- Give feedback and correct.

* Vocabulary

ranger (n) : ngời phụ trách khu bảo tån
edge (n) : r×a mÐp

canyon (n) : hỴm nói

breathtaking (adj) : nín thở,
temperate (adj) : ơn hồ
Stone Age (n) : thời đồ đá

magnificent (adj) : nguy nga, léng lÉy
1. Complete the letter.

(1) C (3) D
( 2) B (4) A

2. Write a letter to a friend.
Necessary

information Your information

Place
Distance

How to get there
Sight

Weather
How you feel

3. Correction

E. Guiding – Homework

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Week 30
Period 90

Preparing date: 31 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 03 - 04 - 2012
unit 14: wonders of the world

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use structures of passive, indirect
questions, question words before to-infinitives and verb + to-infinitive to practice.
B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Matching
A

1. construct
2. reach
3. present
4. complete
5. design
6. point out
7. advise

B
a. tặng
b. thiết kế
c. xây dung
d. chỉ, trỏ
e. khuyên

f. tới, đến
g. hoàn thành

Key
1- c
2 – f
3 – a

4 – g
5 - b
6 – d
7 – e
II. New lesson

- T shows the exercise and guides.
+ What tense is used in the sentence?
+ What is form of passive in the Past
Simple tense?

- Ss read the given verbs and sentences.
- Ss work in pairs to complete the
sentences.

- T checks and corrects.

- T sets the scene: in book.
- T explains the example.

- Ask Ss to retell the uses and form of
indirect yes/no question.

- Ask Ss to report each question.
- T checks and corrects.

+ Ss write each sentence on the board.

1. Complete the sentences.
Example:

a. Sydney Opera House was completed
in 173.

* Passive in Past Simple tense:
was/ were + PII

b. was constructed
c. was designed
d. was presented
e. was reached
2. Report questions

Ex: a. Do you know My Son, Nga?

Nhi asked Nga if she knew My Son.
whether

* Reported Yes/ No question

S1+asked+O+if/ whether+S2+V(past)
+ ...

b. Nhi asked Nga if it was far from Ha
Noi.

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

- T sets the scene: in book.

- T shows the exercise and guides.
- T explains the example.

- Ss say form of sentences.

- Ss write each sentence on the board.
- T checks and corrects.

- T explains the example.

- Ss read each sentence and complete.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss say form of verbs after some verbs.
- Ss listen and copy, then give examples.
- T checks and corrects.

Quang Nam province.

d. Nhi asked Nga whether many people
lived My Son.

3. Write sentences

Ex: a. tell/ how/ go there
Nga told Nhi how to go there.

= Nga told Nhi how they could go to
there.

* Reduced form of indirect question
S+V+(O)+question word+to-infinitive ...
b. Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets.
c. Nga pointed out Nhi where to buy
souvenirs.

4. Complete the passage.
Ex: They decided to go for run.

(1) to jog
(2) go
(3) to gather
(4) to rain

(5) to reach
(6) to continue
(7) get

* Form:

- Bare infinitive after modal verbs: can,
could, should, might, may, must, have to,
ought to,...

- To-infinitive after almost verbs: decide,
want, try, start, begin, would like, ...

E. Guiding – Homework

- Do all the exercises again.

- Revise units 12, 13, 14: vocabulary, grammar, skills.

Week 30
Period 91

Preparing date: 01 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 04 - 04 - 2012
Revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review and conclude the main
knowledge of the units: 12, 13, 14.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

Match the names of the country with their wonders.

Key:

1. Iraq
2. Egypt
3. Malaysia
4. France

B
a. The Great Wall
b. The Eiffel Tower

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

1 – c
2 – g
3 – e
4- b
5 – h
6 – a
7 – f
8 - d

II. New lesson

I. Language skills (20’ )
1. Listening

- runs through all the listening tasks in Units 12-14
+ Listening to the weather forecast

+ Listening about preparations for a festival

+ Listening to a conversation about a place of interest
- gives instructions about how to do these tasks

- says some notes for this item
2. Reading

- runs through all the reading texts in Units 12-14
+ a text about some places of interest

+ a text about a festival
+ some wonders of the world

- explains some more about how to do each type of reading tasks
3. Writing

- goes through all the writing tasks in Units 12-14
+ writing a postcard

+ writing a report on a festival

+ writing a letter about a trip to somewhere

- explains some more about how to do each type of writing tasks
4. Speaking

- goes through all the speaking tasks in Units 12-14
+ making plans for a trip

+ speaking about preparations for a festival
+ reporting Yes/No-questions

- says some notes about these speaking tasks
II. Grammar (24’ )

- explains some more about some grammar items in Units 12-14
+ Past Progressive

+ Present Progressive with always
+ Passive forms: Be + past participle
+ Compound words: rice-cooking
+ Reported speech

+ Indirect questions with if/ whether
+ Question words before to-infinitive
+ Verb + to-infinitive

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

Ex6 (P74), Ex1 (P76), Ex3 (P78), Ex4 (P79), Ex4 (P86), Ex5 (P87)
- gives instructions on how to do these exercises

- asks students to do the exercises
- asks students to call out the answers
- gives feedback and corrects

E. Guiding – Homework

- Do the exercises in workbook again.

- Revise the knowledge to prepare for test 45’.

Week 30

Period 92

Preparing date: 06 – 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 09 - 04 – 2012

test 45’

A/ Objectives

Ss are able to:

- Listening: Listen to a paragraph and correct the information.
- Reading: Read a letter and complete it.

- Writing: Complete a letter, using given words.

- Language focus: Choose the best options about main grammar.

B/ Ma trËn

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng

TN TL TN TL TN TL

I. Listening 5

2,5 5 2,5

II. Reading 10

2,5 10 2,5

III. Language

focus 5 2,5

5 2,5

IV. Writing 5

2,5 5 2,5

Tæng 10

5,0 10 2,5 5 2,5 25 10

C/ Content

I. Listen and fill in the table (2 marks)

City Weather Temperature

Low High

Viet Tri cold (1) ... (2)... 19 oC
Ha Noi (3) ... rainy (4)... 20 oC
Ho Chi Minh city (5) ... (6) ... 27 oC 32 oC

Da Lat cool cloudy (7) ... (8) ...
II. Which underlined part is pronounced differently from the others? (1 mark)

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

3. A. hour B. honor C. how D. honest
4. A. husk B. upset C. urge D. rub
III. Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. (2 marks)
1. My family...when the mailman came.

A. was sleeping B. is sleeping C. has slept D. slept

2. He asked me ...I liked coffee.

A. whether B. weather C. where D. which

3. Some people are taking part in ... contest.

A. a cooking- rice B. a rice- cooking C. a cooked- rice D. a rice- cooked

4. Mai showed Lan where...ticket.

A.got B. to get C.get D.getting

5. Hoa...to the market at 7.00 yesterday evening.

A. is going B. were going C. was going D. went

6. Minh ...his homework.

A. always is forgetting B. forget C. is always forgetting D. forgot

7. Angkor Wat is one of the largest ...in the world.

A. churches B. wonders C. pagoda D. temples

8. Lien decided ...to Ho Chi Minh city yesterday

A. going B. went C. go D. to go

IV. Read the passage

In the country of China, there is a wall that is 1,500 miles long. It is called the Great Wall of
China. It wind up hill and down, through valleys and mountains. Every inch of this 1,500 mile
wall was made by hand.

The Great Wall of China was made many, many years ago. The people of China made it to
keep out their enemies. There are watch towers all along the way. The wall is made of brick
and earth. It is high and wide on the top. People can walk along the top as if it were a road

- to wind(v): chạy quanh co ngoằn nghèo
- (a) watch tower: tháp canh

1, True (T) or false (F) (2 marks)

a, The Great Wall was made with the help of machines
b, It was built in a short time

c, It is made of brick and earth.
d. It is very long. It is 2000 miles
 2, Answer (1 mark)

a, How long is the Great Wall of China?...

b, What is the Wall made of?...
*8A.V. Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same.(2 
marks)

1. "Is the Statue of Liberty in New York ?" She asked me.

She asked………...……..………
2. All of you must do this test carefully.

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

The children said ...
4. The last time I met Lan was in 1990.

I haven't...
5. They built this house in 1987.

This house...
6. His mother asked him, “Do you go to school?”

His mother asked him...
7. Hung said, “I can fix this fan”.

Hung said...
8. I have cooked the meal for an hour.

-> The meal...
*8B,C .V: Read the letter and complete it. (2,5 marks)

wonderful visited souvenirs cool and sunny postcard

family friendly soon nice took

Dear Mary,

I am having a (1) ... time in Vietnam. The weather is (2) ...
The people are (3) ...

In Hanoi, I (4) ... my friend, Hoa and her (5) ... It was(6) ... to
meet them.

I bought lots of (7) ... and (8) ... a lot of photos. Hope you’re well. Did you
receive a (9) ... I sent you on the first day I arrived in Vietnam?

See you (10) ...
Your friend,

Tom

Keys
I, Listen and fill in the table (2 marks) each is 0,25
Here is today’s weather forecast.

- Let’s start with Viet Tri. It will be cold and windy. For the temperature, the low will be
thirteen degrees (13 oC) and the hight will be nineteen degrees (19 oC.)

- Ha Noi will be cold and rainy with a low of sixteen degrees (16 oC) and the high of twenty
degrees (20 oC)

- HCM city will be hot and dry with a low of twenty seven degrees (27 oC) and the high of
thirty degrees (32 oC)

- Da Lat will be cool and cloudy with a high of nineteen degrees (19 oC.)
and the low of twenty five degrees 25 oC

1. windy 2.13 oC 3. cold 4. 16 oC 
5. hot 6. dry 7.19 oC 8. 25 oC

II. Which underlined part is pronounced differently from the others?(1 mark) each is 0,25

1c 2c 3c 4c

III. Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. (2 marks) each is 0,25

1. A 2. A 3. B 4. B

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

IV. Read the passage

1, True (T) or false (F) (2marks) each is 0,5

1F 2F 3T 4F

2, Answer (1mark)each is 0,5
a, It is 1,500 miles long.

b, It is made of brick and earth.

V. 8A (2 marks)

1. She asked me if the Statue of Liberty in
New York was.

2. This test must be done carefully by all of
you.

3The children said that they were going to
school.

4. I haven't met Lan since 1990.

5. This house was built in 1987

6. His mother asked him if he went to school.
7. Hung said that he could fix that fan.

8. The meal has been cooked for an hour by
me.

V. 8B. 2 marks ( 10 x 0,2 marks)

(1) wonderful (6) nice
(2) cool and sunny (7) souvenirs
(3) friendly (8) took
(4) visited (9) postcard
(5) family (10) soon

E. Guiding – Homework

- Redo the test.

Week 31
Period 93

Preparing date: 07 - 04 – 2012 Teaching date: 10 - 04 – 2012
unit 15: computers

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to express their opinions about a
problem.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape, picture
C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up

- T introduces the lesson and writes the
topic on the board.

- Ask Ss to think of the topic and express
their opinions.

- Collect Ss opinion and write them on
the board.

- T elicits some new words.

I. Getting started

* Computer can help us:

- Computers save time.

- Computers help us learn interesting.
- Computers help us learn more quickly.
- Computers are convenient / easy for
keeping/ storing information.

- Computers are quickly in giving
answers to our questions.

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

picture
situation
translation
explanation

realia
realia

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T hangs the picture on the board and
introduces the dialogue.

- Ss look at books, listen to tape the first
time, and then answer the questions.
- T checks some Ss and corrects.
Answer: The printer isn’t working.
- Ss listen to tape again.

- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.

- T introduces and explains the exercise.
- T explains the example.

- Ss read the sentences.

- Ss read the dialogue again and do the
exercise.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to find sentences in the Present
Perfect tense in the dialogue.

- T writes on the board.

- Ss read and say form of the verb.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
report it.

- Ss work in small groups.

- T calls on some Ss to write on the
board.

- T corrects.

printer (n) : m¸y in

manual (n) : s¸ch híng dÉn sư dơng
connect (v) : kÕt nèi

under guarantee : bảo hành
plug (n) : phÝch c¾m
socket (n) : ỉ c¾m

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.
Question

What is the problem with the printer?

2. Fact or Opinion.

a, F d, F
b, O e, F
c, O f, O

3. Grammar

* Model sentences:

S1: Have you turned it on yet?
S2: Yes, I have already done it.
Present Perfect tense:

have / has + PII
4. Write it up

Example:

Nam said that the printer wasn’t
working.

E. Guiding - Homework

- Read the dialogue again many time.

- Do exercise 2 on pages 90, 91 in workbook.

Complete the sentences, using the verbs in the present perfect tense.
Ex: a. This computer is the best one I have ever used.

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

Week 31

Period 94

Preparing date: 08 -04 - 2012 Teaching date: 11 – 04 – 2012
correcting the test

A/ Objectives

knowledge better.

B/ Language content:

- The skills of listening, reading, writing

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, 
D/ Material: papers

E. Correcting the test

I/ Warm up Chatting
1. Is the test difficult or easy?

2. How many exercises are there in the test?
3. Which exercise easy/ difficult?

4. How many marks do you think you will get?
1. Good aspect: Listening, reading,

2. Bad aspect : grammar and writing
+ Ss get good marks:

+ Ss get bad marks :

3. Comment mistakes Correcting/ methods

3.1 Listening
3.2 Phonentic
3.3 Language focus
3.4. Reading

3.5 Writing

I: Most of you did well
II

3.The pronunciation of ED
III. Grammar: did well
Note past progressive tense.
IV.

1.b F ( It was made by hands so it took a very
long time)

2. The answer to the question with “how long”
V. 8A. Note the grammar of Passive form and
Reported speech

5. Point and key

I, Listen and fill in the table (2 
marks) each is 0,25

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

5. hot 6. dry

7.19

oC 8. 25 oC

II. Which underlined part is pronounced differently from the others?(1 mark) each is 0,25

1c 2c 3c 4c

III. Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. (2 marks) each is 0,25

1. A 2. A 3. B 4. B

5. C 6. C 7. D 8. D

IV. Read the passage

1, True (T) or false (F) (2marks) each is 0,5

1F 2F 3T 4F

2, Answer (1mark)each is 0,5
a, It is 1,500 miles long.

b, It is made of brick and earth.

V. Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown, so that the meaning stays the same (2 marks)

1. She asked me if the Statue of Liberty in New
York was.

2. This test must be done carefully by all of you.
3The children said that they were going to school.
4. I haven't met Lan since 1990.

5. This house was built in 1987

6. His mother asked him if he went to school.
7. Hung said that he could fix that fan.

8. The meal has been cooked for an hour by me.

*8B,C

V. 8B. 2 marks ( 10 x 0,2 marks)

1. wonderful (6) nice
2. cool and sunny (7) souvenirs
3. friendly (8) took
4. visited (9) postcard
5. family (10) soon

Week 32
Period 95

Preparing date: 13 - 04 – 2012 Teaching date: 16 - 04 – 2012
unit 15: computers

Lesson 2: Speak 
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use some common useful
expressions to express agreement and disagreement

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
* Anticipated problems: not enough time

C/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Slap the board

amusing

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

II. New lesson
1. Presentation

- T elicits some new words.
translation
explanation

picture
translation

picture

Checking: Rub out and Remember.
- T sets the scene and introduces the
expressions in the table.

- Ss look at book and listen.
- T explains if necessary.
2. Practice

- T introduces the exercise 1 and guides.
- Ss read the example.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs.

3. Production

- T introduces the picture and dialogue.
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.

- T checks one pair.

- Ask Ss to read the words in the box.
- t guides Ss to make dialogue follow the

I. Speak
* Vocabulary

time-consuming (adj) : tèn thêi gian
challenging (adj) : mang tÝnh th¸ch thøc
monitor (n) : bé kiĨm tra

screen (n) : màn ảnh
adjust (v) : ®iỊu chØnh
knob (n) : nót (vỈn)
1. Brainstorm

Useful expressions to express agreement
and disagreement.

(in book)

2. Work with a partner.

Example:

T: I think computers are useful.
S1: So do I.

S2: I disagree. I think they are
unnecessary.

a) Learning to drive a car.
- easy

- difficult/ challenging/ dangerous
b) Reading comic books

- boring/ time-consuming
- interesting/ fun

c) Playing in the rain

- fun / interesting / entertainment
- unhealthy

d) Foreign food
- delicious/ fun to eat
- unhealthy

3. Read and make similar dialogues.
* Mapped dialogue:

S1 S2

I am having

problems with ...

What’s wrong?

delicious dangerou unhealthy

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

mapped dialogue.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.

It .... I think it’s
broken.

No. You didn’t ....
Oh! Sorry.

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Write the dialogues they make in notebook.
- Do exercise 1 on page 90 in workbook.
Make sentences with given words.

Ex: a. I have owned this computer for three years.
- Prepare: Read

Week 32
Period 96

Preparing date: 14 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 17 - 04 - 2012
unit 15: computers

Lesson 3:Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listening for specific information to
fill in the gaps and order sentences .

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette, tape

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC
* Anticipated problems: not enough time

C/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Slap the board

II. New lesson
1. Pre- listening 
- Elicit words from Ss
- Have Ss copy

- Inform the topic: paper-making process.
- Have Ss read the sentences

2. While- listening

- Play the tape 2or 3 times and ask Ss to fill
in the gaps with the words they catch.
- Ask Ss to compare their answers with
theirs partners.

- Call on Ss to give theirs answers.
- Give feed back and corrects

- Ask Ss to read the sentences (a->g)
carefully and guess the order.

- Write the Ss' prediction on the board.

Listen
Vocabulary
- procedure (n): quy tr×nh
- pulp (n): bét giÊy

- vat (n): thùng, bể, chum
- (to) drain: làm ráo nớc
- roller (n): trục lăn
- roll (n): cuộn

1. Listen and fill in the gaps in these
sentences.

Answer key.
1. simple
2. same

3. two hundred

amusing

difficult boring

delicious dangerou unhealthy

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

- Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen.
- Call on Ss to give their correction
- Give feedback and correct.

- gets students to listen to the tape (2 or 3
times) and check their predictions

- gets Ss to compare their answers with
their partner

- calls on Ss to write their answers on the
board

3. Post- listening

- gives feedback and corrects

4. left
5. rollers

2. Listen again. Put the sentences in to

the correct order.

Answer key:
c-d-a-e-g-f-b

D. Homework

- practice the dialogues again

- writes all the exercises in your exercise book

Week 32
Period 97

Preparing date: 15 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 18 - 04 - 2012
unit 15: computers

Lesson 3:Read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about how computers
work in a university.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

(1) terpirn = printer (4) nimorot = monitor
(2) seumo = mouse (5) bdoaryke = keyboard\

(3) recsne = screen

II. New lesson
1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
situation
explanation

translation
situation
translation

example
explanation
Check: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the text.

- Ask Ss to read the sentences and
predict True or False.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks 2 Ss.

2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to correct false sentence.
- T introduces the questions.
- Ss read the questions.
- T explains if necessary.
- Ss ask and answer in pairs.

- T asks some pairs to ask and answer.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Post-reading

- Ss read the question e) and discuss in
small groups.

- Ask some Ss to say their ideas.
- T collects and writes on the board.

* Vocabulary

freshman (n) : sinh viên năm thứ nhất
jack (n) : ổ cắm

bulletin board (n) : bảng thông báo
skeptical (adj) : hoµi nghi

impact (n) : tác động, ảnh hởng
concern (n) : mối quan tâm
campus (n) : khu sân bãi

1. True or False?

* Prediction
* Reading

a. T b. T c. T d. F e. T f. T

* Correction

d. Student don’t have to ...

2. Answer

a. It has no library. All the information
normally found in a library is now stored
in the university computers.

b. They are all the information normally
found in a library or messages normally
found on a bulletin board.

c. A computer and a telephone line.
d. With a bulletin board on the Internet,
a great number of people (over 20
million) can get access to the bulletin
board and exchange information quickly.
3. Discussion

Would you like to complete a college
degree from home? Why / Why not?

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 6 on page 94 in workbook.

Write the verbs in the present perfect or past simple.
Example:

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

Past Simple Present Perfect
- Prepare part: Write

Read the lesson before.

Week 33
Period 98

Preparing date: 20 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 23 - 04 - 2012
unit 15: computers

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a set of instructions on how
to use the printer.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC

D/ Procedures:

I. Warm up Brainstorming

monitor

II. New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T elicits some new words.
picture
picture
explanation
explanation

picture

antonym (>< remove)
picture

explanation

Checking: Rub out and Remember
- T introduces the picture and
requirement.

- Ss read and match.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
2. While-writing

- T introduces the pictures, words and
requirement.

- Ss read the words.
- T explains if necessary.

- Ss write sentences individual (10’)

* Vocabulary

paper input tray (n) : khay đựng giấy
power button (n) : nút điện

icon (n) : biĨu tỵng

output path (n) : đờng cung cấp kết quả
remove (v) : lấy (bỏ) ra

load (v) : cho vµo
flash (v) : loÐ s¸ng
click (v) : kÝch chuét
1. Matching

a) – 3, b) – 1, c) – 6
d) – 2, e) - 4, d) – 5
2. Write the instructions.

* Note: instructions
- Form: V + O ...
without subject
* Instructions

- Plug the printer and turn on the power.
- Remove the old paper and load the new
paper in the paper input tray.

- Wait for the power button to flash.

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- Ss compare with a partner.
3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- T calls some Ss to write their sentences
on the board.

- T checks Ss’ writings.
- T corrects.

- Have the pages appear on the computer
screen.

- Click the printer icon on the screen and
wait for a few seconds.

- The printed paper will come out of the
output path in a minute.

3. Correction

E. Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 7 on page 94 in workbook.
Write the instructions to make yogurt.
Ex: Heat milk boiled in one minute.
- Prepare part: Language focus

Read the exercises and do them before.

Week 33
Period 99

Preparing date: 21 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 24 -04 - 2012
unit 15: computers

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use “yet” and “already” to express
the present perfect and compare present perfect tense with past simple.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

C/ Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T- WC 
D/ Procedures:

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

c. Nam has been happy since he had the computer.
d. We have learnt computer science for a month.
e. She has worked at our school since the year 2000.
II. New lesson

- T explains the meaning and use of
“yet” and “already”.

- Ss listen and copy.

- T guides Ss to do the exercise.
- T sets the scene: in book.

- Ss read the given phrases and the
dialogue.

- Ss work in pairs to complete it.
- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the two tables.
- Ss read the examples.

- One pair read aloud.

- Ss work in pairs to ask and answer.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.

- T introduces 2 sentences.
- Ss read them and compare the
difference between 2 sentences.
- Ss remark.

- T listens and corrects.

- Ss read and check the sentences.
- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement.

- Ss read and complete each dialogue in
pairs.

- T calls on some pairs to read.
- T listens and corrects.

- T asks Ss to say the difference between
two tenses.

1. Complete the dialogue.

* “yet” and “already” in Present Perfect”
- yet (cha) is used in question and

negative. It stands at the end of sentence.
- “already” (xong råi) is used in positive.
It stands after have/has.

(1) I have already done my homework.
(2) I haven’t tidied my room yet.

(3) I have already turned off the washing
machine.

(4) I’ve already called and told her to
have lunch with us ...

2. Ask and answer
Example:

S1: Has the flight to Vientiane departed
yet?

S2: Yes. It has already departed.
S1: Has the flight form Los Angeles
arrived yet?

S2: No. It hasn’t arrived yet.
3. Check the correct column.
* Compare:

a) I’ve been to Sa Pa highlands.
-> finished action

b) They have lived in Ca Mau for 10
years. -> incomplete action

- Finished action: the sentence has

identified time.

- Incomplete action: The sentence has
adverbs of time: for, since, recently,
lately,...

* Answer:

- Finished action: a, c, e, f.
- Incomplete action: b, d, g.
4. Complete the dialogues.
(1) Have ... seen

did ... see ... saw
(2) haven’t had
(3) have been
(4) Have ... heard
(5) happed

(6) had
(7) fell
(8) broke

(9) Has ... arrived ... has
did ... arrive ... arrived
* Compare:

- Present Perfect tense: for, since, yet,
already, ...

</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

E. Guiding – Homework

- Do the exercises again in notebook.
- Do exercise 4 on page 92 in workbook.
Ex: a. yet

- Prepare Unit 16: Getting started + Listen and read
Read the lesson before.

Week 33
Period 100

Preparing date: 22 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 25 - 04 - 2012

Revision

A- Objectives:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures from
Unit 9 to Unit 10 to do exercises exactly.

B - Work arrangements:
Individual, pair, group
C- Teaching aids:

reference books, extra board., work sheet
D - Procedure:

I. Warm up:
II. New lesson:

Unit 9:

- Ask Ss to give the main structures :

+ in order to/ so as to
+ future simple tense

+ modal will to make requests, offers and
promises.

- Ask Ss to open the book on page 86 and the notebook at period 70
- Ask Ss to do exercise

Exercise 1: Join each idea in A with an idea from B using "in order (not) to....or/ so
as (not) to....".

A B

1. He drank lots of black coffee.
2. i often write things down
3. She took an umbrella
4. We'll use the computer
5. i want to pass the exam
6. We turned down the music

a. disturb the neighbor.
b. save time

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

1. Yoko...to be here tomorrow (will, may, is going)
2. ...you please help me ? (May, Can, Do)

3. I promise I...come on time. (will, can, have to)

4. ...I use your car, Dad ? Oh, sorry, Tom. I...use it now. (Can-should,
may-must, should- must)

5. ...you answer the telephone for me, please ? (Would, Could, Would or Could)
6. You...play with matches. (don't have to, musn't, none is correct)

7. I promise I won't be late...(I hope so, you must, both of them are correct)
8. Let me help you a hand. ...(No, thank you, That would be nice, both of them are
correct)

Unit 10:

- Ask Ss to give the main structures:

+
Passive forms

+ adjs
followed by an inf or a noun clause.

- Ask Ss to open the book on page 95 and the notebook at period 70
1. The present simple tense in passive form: S + am/is/ are + P2

2. The past simple tense in passive form: S + was/were + P2
3. The future simple tense in passive form: S + will be + P2
4. The present perfect tense in passive form: S + has/have + P2
Ex1: Use the given words to make meaningful sentences.

1. I/ delighted/ receive/ your letter.

2. The children/ not tall enough/ reach/ shelf.
3. he/ eager/ come back/ home.

4. It/ very important/ keep / environment/ clean.
5. She/ lucky/ have/ a lot of good friends.

6. We/ very happy/ live/ together.

Ex2: Change the following sentences in to passive.
1. People grow corn in Ohio.

2. They will build a new bridge in the city.

3. They sent 2 million books to America every year.
4. I will give you a new bike next month.

5. They have just introduces a new style of jeans in the USA.
IV- Homework:

Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt.
Redo all the exercises at home.

Prepare: Revise the knowledge in Units 11,12

Week 34
Period 101

Preparing date: 30 - 04 - 2012 Teaching date: 02 - 05 - 2012

revision

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures of Unit
11, 12 to make their own sentences fluently.

B - Work arrangements:
Individual, pair, group
C- Teaching aids:

reference books, extra board.
D - Procedure:

I. Warm up:
II. New lesson:
Unit 11:

- Ask Ss to open the book on page 108 and the notebook at period 70
1. Ed, ing participles.

a) Ed participles..

This book is 25.000dong. It is made in Vietnam.
-> This book made in Vietnam is 25.000 dong
b) ing participles.

The boy is Nam. He is sitting on the stage.
-> The boy sitting on the stage is Nam
2. Mind

* Form:

Do/ Would you mind + Ving ?
Do you mind if S + V (present simple )?
Would you mind if S + V (past simple )?

- Ask Ss to do exercises
Ex1: Rewrite the sentences using Ef or Ing.

1. That girl is Australian. She is talking to John.

2. A plane crashed into the sea yesterday. It was carrying 28 passengers
3. The man was taken to hospital. He was injured in the accident.
4. The paintings haven't been found yet. They were stolen from the museum.

5. The girl is very intelligent. She's sitting next to me.
Ex2: Put the verbs in the correct forms.

1. Would you mind if I (take) a photo ?
2. Do you mind if my friends (join in) our trip ?

3. Would you mind (open ) the door ?

4. Would you mind if she (take ) these books to her room ?
5. Do you mind if she (get) a taxi to town ?

6. Do you mind (buy) me some bread ?
7. Do you mind if he (ride) your bicycle ?

8. Would you mind if lan (ask) you for some information ?
Unit 12:

- Ask Ss to open the book on page 119 and at period 88.
1. past progressive tense

Eg: I am writing a letter at 6pm yesterday.
S + was/were + Ving (while, when/ as, from ...to)
2. progressive tense with always

Mr Nam is always smoking

S + am/ is/ are + always = Ving (complain)
- Ask Ss to do exercises.

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

1. My mother (sleep) when I (phone).
2. Yesterday it (rain) all the morning.

3. What you (do) from 6am to 8am last Sunday ?
4. Hoa (eat) dinner when the phone (ring )?

5. Mrs Hoa and her husband (cook) while their son (learn) English.
Ex2: Choose the best answer.

1. The radio was...by Tim yesterday (repaired, repairing, repair)
2. Would you...cleaning the floor for me ? (like, please, mind)
3. Would you mind ...I smoked here ? (when, if, where)

4. How about...to the exhibition ? (going, go, to go)

5. While I....dinner, my sister...to music. (was having/ listen, had, was listening, was
having/ was listening)

IV- Homework:

Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt.
Redo all the exercises at home.

Prepare: Revise the knowledge in Units 13,14

Week 36
Period 102

Preparing date: 0 - 05 - 2012 Teaching date: 0 - 05 - 2012

revision

A- Objectives:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures to make
their own sentences exactly.

B - Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group
C - Teaching aids: reference books, extra board.
D - Procedure:

I. Warm up:
II. New lesson:
Unit 13:

1. passive forms
Eg 1: lan cleans the house

- Ask Ss to do ex.
2. compound words

Eg: Vietnam exports rice. We call Vietnam a rice-exporting country

Private noun Ving common noun
3. reported speech

a. Requests in reported speech
S + asked + O + to + inf/ not to + inf.
b, Commands in reported speech

S + told + O + to+ inf/ not to + inf
c. Statements in reported speech
S + said (that) + S + V (past simple tense)
Exercise: Rewrite the sentences using provided words.
1. "I see the children quite often" he said.

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

2. "Take a deep breath" the doctor said to the patient.
-> The doctor...

3. "Could you please open the door for me ?" said the man.
-> The man asked me...

4. "We must go now" they said

-> They said...
5.Nobody told me that George was ill.
->I...
6. Mr Nam has painted his house blue.
-> Mr Nam...
Unit 14:

1. Passive forms(Period 97)
2. Indirect questions with If/ Whether

a. with (to) be

S + asked + O + if/ whether + S + was/were + ...
b. Verb

S + asked + O + if/ whether + S + V (past simple tense)
c. Modal verbs

S + asked + O + if/ whether + S + modal verbs in the past
3. Questions words before to-inf.

S + know/ tell/ request/ ask + how/ what/ when...+ to-inf
* Verb + to-inf

S + need/ want/ decide....+ to=inf.
- Ask Ss to do exercises.
Ex1: Choose the best answer

1. My mother showed me how...clothes (to make, making, made, make)

2. My family has decided...Da Lat in the summer.(to visit, visit, visited, visit)
3. My friend told me what...when i visited Hoi An. (doing, to do, do, done)
4. Mai asked me if Hanoi ...far from Hai Duong. (was, is, was being, to be)
5. Lan asked me if I...good grades. (got, get, getting)

Ex2: Rewrite the sentences.

1. "Do you want to visit the Statue of Liberty one day ?" Ann asked Long.(if)
2. They repaired this road in 2002 (passive voice)

3. "What should I do during the 3 days off ?"Lan asked her friends (what + to...
4. They built these two pagodas under the Nguyen dynasty. (passive voice)
5. "Do you like reading when you have free time ?"(whether)

Trang Asked Mai
IV- Homework:

Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt.
Redo all the exercises at home.

Prepare: Revise the knowledge in Units 15,16

Week 36
Period 103

Preparing date: 0 - 05 - 2012 Teaching date: 0 - 05 - 2012

revision

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use vocabulary and structures to make

their own sentences exactly.

B - Work arrangements: Individual, pair, group
C - Teaching aids: reference books, extra board.
D - Procedure:

I. Warm up:
II. New lesson:

Unit15

Present perfect: “Yet & Already”

o We use “yet” in negative and interrogative. It is put at the end of the sentence.
For example.

Have you had lunch yet ?

( Bạn ăn trưa chưa ? )

No. I haven’t had lunch yet.
( Chưa. Mình chưa ăn trưa. )

o We use “already” in affirmative. It can stand after subject and before main verb or
at the end of the sentence.

For example.

Have you taken the semester exam yet?
Yes. I have already taken the semester exam.
(I have taken the semester exam already.)

Comparison of present perfect and past simple

o We use the present perfect to express actions with unidentified time and the past
simple with identified time.

For example.

She has seen this film before. (Present perfect)
She saw this film 10 years ago.( past simple )

o We use the present perfect to express actions which happened in the past and
continued in present and future, but we use the past simple to express actions
which happened and finished in the past.

For example.

She has learnt English for 2 years.
She learned English two years ago.
*PHONENTIC

VI/ Pick out the words that has the underlined letters pronounced differently from the 
others:

A B C D

1. arrived sight island prison

2. who what where which

3. head beach weather heavy

4. why try dry gym

5. mind window find tidy
6. small tall plane hall
7. bread meat team please
8. environment birthday white stripe
9. copy novel pop come
10. wanted needed attended worked

11. bank station lazy vacation
12. stopped watched learned looked

13. repair relax energetic enjoy

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

15. school teacher children chicken
16. compile snorkel memorize compete
17. heritage ranger jungle pomegranate
18. require install fix restrict
19. connect fetch recognize concern
20. gallery valley contact wharf
READING

G/ When Minh started learning English ,he was really shy .In class he never said a word in English
because he was afraid of making mistakes .And he became more and more quiet in English classes
.Anyway ,his English teacher was a very kind and friendly woman .She encouraged him to practice
English with a partner or in a group .She said it might help him more confident .She often praised him
when he said something good .He was really frightened at first talking to his classmates in English
.But his teacher said the only way to learn speaking English is by speaking it .And he did it . Now he
feels confident enough to speak English in front of the class .

1. Answer the questions :(1,5ms)

a.Why did Minh never say a word in English class ?
………..

b.How was his English teacher ? ………
cWhat did his English teacher do when he said something good ?

……….
2 True(T)or Fasle (F)?(1,5)

a. Minh was not shy when he started learning English ………..

b His teacher encouraged him to practice English with a partner or in the group.
c Now he speak English in front of the class confidently

H/ Yesterday, when I was riding along a busy street, I saw an (21)___. A woman was knocked down
when she crossed the street at a zebra crossing. Many people stopped (22)_____ their help. A police
man arrived and asked a young man to telephone for an (23)____While waiting for the ambulance, the
policeman and some people tried to (24)_____the bleeding. They used a handkerchief to cover the
wound, then put pressure on it. and held it (25)____They tried to talk to her in (26)_____to keep her
(27)_____After about three minutes, the ambulance (28)____and the woman was taken to the hospital.

21. a. accident b. event c. ambulance d. emergency

22. a. offer b. offering c. to offering d. to offer

23. a. ambulance b. first-aid c. arrangement d. address

24. a. cut b. hold c. stop d. cover

25. a. tight b. tightly c. tightness d. tights

26. a. time b. as c. addition d. order

27. a. awake b. unconscious c. asleep d. warm

28. a. arrives b. is arriving c. arrived d. has arrived

VII. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English.

1. David sang so badly that I had to look away not so as to laugh at him.
A B C D
2. If you look carefully, you are finding writing scratched on the glass.
A B C D

3. Matt was trying to calm the baby out by singing to her.
A B C D

4. I was very tired and I tried keeping my eyes open but I couldn’t.
A B C D
5. They pulled the boy out of the river and tried reviving him.
A B C D
6. I carried the knife carefully to not cut myself.

A B C D

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

A B C D
8. I think you are enjoying the party tomorrow.

A B C D

9. Why don’t you come across this evening and we’ll talk about it then?
A B C D

10. Try to giving as much detail as possible in your answer.
A B C D

11. This wall is to keeping people out of the garden.
A B C D

12. He took the job in order not to earn more money, but to live closer to live closer to his sister.
A B C D

13. I covered the floor by newspaper before I started paintin.
A B C D
14. I’m very tired but I’m sure a cup of coffee will revival me.
A B C D
15. Could you give me your answer today, if possibly?

A B C D

16. The project will be show to the public when it is finished,
A B C D

17. We must act now before it is too late doing anything about the problem.
A B C D

18. Can’t we deal with this now instead of wait until tomorrow?

IV- Homework:

Learnt by heart all the structures your learnt.
Redo all the exercises at home.

Prepare the term test

Week 37
Period 104

Preparing date: - 05 - 2012 Teaching date: - 05 - 2012
the second term test

TEST FOR CLASS 8A

* Sơ đồ ma trận

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng

TN TL TN TL TN TL

I. Listening 4

2 4 2

II. Reading

6 3 6 3

III. Language

focus 10 3 10 3

IV. Writing 8

2 8 2

Tæng 10

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

I. Listen then complete the form below. (2p)

Full name:(1) ...
Class:(2) ...
Date of birth:(3) ...
Hobbies:(4) ...
...
II. Read the folktale below then answer the questions. (3p)

Once a farmer lived a comfortable life with his family. His chickens laid many eggs
which the farmer used to sell to buy food and clothing for his family.

One day, he went to collect the eggs and dicovered one of the chickens laid a gold egg.
He shouted excitedly to his wife, “We’re rich! We’re rich!” His wife ran to him and they
both looked at the egg in amazement. The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to
cut open all the chickens and find more gold eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any
gold eggs. When he finished all, the chickens were dead. There were no more eggs of
any kind for the foolish farmer and his greedy wife.

1. Who lived a comfortable life?

2. Did the farmer use to sell chickens to buy food and clothing?
3. How many gold eggs did he discover?

4. Why did the farmer decide to cut open all the chickens?
5. Could he find any more gold eggs?

6. Were all the chickens dead?

III. Circle the best option to complete each sentence. (3p)
1. I used to ... fishing when I was a young boy.

a. going b. go c. went d. to go

2. I was born...October 15, 1994.

a. in b. at c. under d. on

3. Miss Jackson asked me...you this dictionary.

a. give b. giving c. to give d. to giving

4. Could you ...me a favor?

a. do b. give c. make d. bring

5. The prince immediately fell...love with Little Pea.

a. to b. in c. on d. at

6. Thanh likes...to music very much.

a. listened b. listen c. listening d. listens

7. I love teaching and Mr Hung loves teaching,...

a. too b. either c. but d. also

8. Mr Nam ...to bring this book to you.

a. told to me b. said c. said me d. told me

9. My brother usually helps me... my homework.

a. with b. about c. of d. at

10. Lan always gets good grades because she studies...

a. good b. goodly c. hardly d. hard

IV. Write a letter to your friend using the prompts given below (2p)
Dear Lan,

1. I/be/ happy/ tell/ you/ I/be/ going/ join/ the Y&Y Green Group.
2. The Green Group/ be/ having/ environment week.

3. We / be/ going/ sweep/ the roads/ our neighborhood.
4. We/ be/ going/ plant trees and flowers/ the school garden.
5. And we/ water /them/ everyday/ too.

6. We/ be / plant / young trees / sell/ other schools.

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

8. Write/ me/ soon/ tell/ your news.

The Listening text

(The teacher reads the text twice)

Hello, my name is Nguyen Thu Huong. I am thirteen years old. I live in Tien Dong
Commune with my parents and my younger brother. I go to Tien Dong secondary
School. I’m in class 8C. I’m good at English. I was born on October 2nd, 1996. My
hobbies are watching TV and studying English.

Answer key
I: (2p)

17.Nguyen Thu Huong
18.8 C

19.October 2nd, 1996

20.watching TV and studying English
II. (3p)

13.A farmer lived a comfortable life
14.No, he didn’t.

15.He discovered one/a gold egg.

16.Because his wife wanted more (gold eggs).

17.No, he couldn’t.

18.Yes, they were.
III. (3p)

1- b 2- d 3- c 4- a 5- b

6- c 7- a 8- d 9- a 10- d

IV. (2p)

1. I’m (very) happy to tell you that I’m going to join the Y&Y Green Group.
2. The Green Group is having an environment week.

3. We are going to sweep the roads in our neighborhood.

4. We are going to plant trees and flowers in the school garden.
5. And we water them everyday, too.

6. We are planting young trees to sell to other schools.

7. We hope to give more green color to our school and earn some money for our
school Y&Y.

8. Write to me soon and tell (me) all your news.
E/ Guiding – Homework

- Redo the test.
Week 13

Period 37 Teaching date: 03/12/2009
test 45’

A/ Objectives
Ss are able to:

- Listening: Listen to a paragraph of studying.
- Reading: Read a passage about study habit.
- Writing: Complete a letter, using given words.

- Language focus: Choose the best options about main grammar.
B/ Ma trËn

test for class 8b

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng

TN TL TN TL TN TL

I. Listening 10

2,5 10 2,5

II. Reading

5 2,5 5 2,5

III. Language

focus 6 3,0 6 3,0

IV. Writing 4

2 4 2,0

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

5,5 2,5 2 10
C/ Content

I/ Listen and complete the paragraph with given words. (2,5 marks)

improve, pronunciation, school, English, grammar,
after, bad, teacher, classroom, me

In the first year of lower secondary (1) ……... I had some difficulties in learning (2)

……... My (3) ……... of English words was really (4) ……... and my English (5)

……... was worse. I did not know how to (6) ……... them. One afternoon (7) ……....
the lesson, my (8) ……... of English told (9) ……... to wait for her outside the (10)
...

II/ Choose the best options (3 marks)
1. She asked me …….... her next week.

A. to meet B. meet C. met D. meeting

2. I was born …….... May 24th 1977.

A. in B. at C. on D. between

3. Mr. Hao should ………. the house.

A. painted B. painting C. paints D. paint

4. Lan used to ……….. in Hue.

A. stayed B. stay C. staying D. stays

5. She speaks English ………

A. good B. goods C. badly D. bad

6. He doesn’t like ………the clothes every day.

A. washing B. wash C. washes D. to wash

III/ Read the paragraph and answer the questions. (2,5 marks)

Lan has a little notebook. She always has the little notebook with her. She tries to fill
one page a day. Sometimes she puts words in groups. For examples- colors, clothes,
fruits,… She has some grammar pages. She writes regular verbs, irregular verbs,

propositions on those grammar pages. She thinks prepositions are difficult. You know –

on Sunday, in the evening but at night.
Answer the questions:

1. What does she always have with her?

2. How many pages does she try to fill a day?
3. In what way does she put words?

4. What does she write on grammar pages?
5. Are prepositions difficult for her?

IV/ Complete the letter. ( 2 marks)
Dear Donna,

Thanks for your letter. I’m please to hear you had an enjoyable Mother’s Day.We/
receive/ secondary semester report/ last month. I/ get/ good grades/ Geography/ Math/
English. I / need/ improve/ History/ Literature.

We/ going/ Ha Long Bay/ next week. I will send you a postcard from there.
Write soon and tell me all your news.

</div>
(175)<div class='page_container' data-page=175>

D/ Answer

I/ 2,5 marks – each correct word is 0,25 marks

(2) year (6) improve
(3) English (7) after
(4) pronunciation (8) teacher
(5) bad (9) me

(6) grammar (10) classroom
II/ 3 marks – each correct part is 0,5 marks

2. A. to meet (4) B. stay
3. C. on (5) C. badly

4. D. paint (6) A. washing
III/ 2,5 marks – each correct word is 0,5 marks

1. She always has a little notebook with her.
2. She tries to fill one page a day.

3. She puts words in groups.

4. She writes regular verbs, irregular verbs and positions on grammar pages.
5. Yes, they are.

IV/ 2 marks – each correct sentence is 0,5 marks.

- We received my secondary semester report last month.

- I got good grades for Geography, Math and English.

- I need to improve History and Literature.

- We are going to Ha Long Bay next week.
TEST FOR CLASS 8C

* Sơ đồ ma trận

Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng

TN TL TN TL TN TL

I. Listening 4

2 4 2

II. Reading

6 3 6 3

III. Language

focus 10 3 10 3

IV. Writing 8

2 8 2

Tæng 10

3 4 2 6 3 8 2 28 10

I. Listen then complete the form below. (2p)

Full name:(1) ...
Class:(2) ...
Date of birth:(3) ...
Hobbies:(4) ...
...
II. Read the folktale below then answer the questions. (3p)

</div>
(176)<div class='page_container' data-page=176>

cut open all the chickens and find more gold eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any
gold eggs. When he finished all, the chickens were dead. There were no more eggs of
any kind for the foolish farmer and his greedy wife.

1. Who lived a comfortable life?

2. Did the farmer use to sell chickens to buy food and clothing?
3. How many gold eggs did he discover?

4. Why did the farmer decide to cut open all the chickens?
5. Could he find any more gold eggs?

6. Were all the chickens dead?

III. Circle the best option to complete each sentence. (3p)
1. I used to ... fishing when I was a young boy.

a. going b. go c. went d. to go

2. I was born...October 15, 1994.

a. in b. at c. under d. on

3. Miss Jackson asked me...you this dictionary.

a. give b. giving c. to give d. to giving

4. Could you ...me a favor?

a. do b. give c. make d. bring

5. The prince immediately fell...love with Little Pea.

a. to b. in c. on d. at

6. Thanh likes...to music very much.

a. listened b. listen c. listening d. listens

7. I love teaching and Mr Hung loves teaching,...

a. too b. either c. but d. also

8. Mr Nam ...to bring this book to you.

a. told to me b. said c. said me d. told me

9. My brother usually helps me... my homework.

a. with b. about c. of d. at

10. Lan always gets good grades because she studies...

a. good b. goodly c. hardly d. hard

IV. Write a letter to your friend using the prompts given below (2p)
Dear Lan,

1. I/be/ happy/ tell/ you/ I/be/ going/ join/ the Y&Y Green Group.
2. The Green Group/ be/ having/ environment week.

3. We / be/ going/ sweep/ the roads/ our neighborhood.
4. We/ be/ going/ plant trees and flowers/ the school garden.
5. And we/ water /them/ everyday/ too.

6. We/ be / plant / young trees / sell/ other schools.

7. We/ hope/ give/ more green color/ our school/ and/ earn / money/ our school Y&Y.
8. Write/ me/ soon/ tell/ your news.

The Listening text

(The teacher reads the text twice)

Answer key
I: (2p)

</div>
(177)<div class='page_container' data-page=177>

22.8 C

23.October 2nd, 1996

24.watching TV and studying English
II. (3p)

19.A farmer lived a comfortable life

20.No, he didn’t.

21.He discovered one/a gold egg.

22.Because his wife wanted more (gold eggs).
23.No, he couldn’t.

24.Yes, they were.
III. (3p)

1- b 2- d 3- c 4- a 5- b

6- c 7- a 8- d 9- a 10- d

IV. (2p)

9. I’m (very) happy to tell you that I’m going to join the Y&Y Green Group.
10.The Green Group is having an environment week.

11. We are going to sweep the roads in our neighborhood.

12.We are going to plant trees and flowers in the school garden.
13.And we water them everyday, too.

14.We are planting young trees to sell to other schools.

15.We hope to give more green color to our school and earn some money for our
school Y&Y.

16.Write to me soon and tell (me) all your news.

E/ Guiding – Homework

- Redo the test.

Week 113

Period 38 Teaching date: 04 /12/ 2009
correcting the test

A/ Objectives

- Ss know the correct answer of the test.

- To correct the Ss’ typical mistakes in the test.
B/ Teaching aids:

test papers.

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups,
* Anticipated problems:.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Chatting
1. Is the test difficult or easy?

2. How many exercises are there in the test?
3. Which exercise easy/ difficult?

4. How many marks do you think you will get?
II/ New lesson.

* Test for class 8B

- T gives Ss their test papers.
- Ss read and do the test again
individual (5’).

- Ask Ss to compare with a
partner.

- Ask Ss to write the answers on
the board.

A. Answer key of the test
I /Listening

(1) year (6) improve
(2) English (7) after
(3) pronunciation (8) teacher
(4) bad (9) me

(5) grammar (10) classroom
II/ Choose the best options.

1. A. to meet 2. C. on 3. D. paint
4. B. stay 5. C. badly 6. A. washing

III/ Answer the questions

</div>
(178)<div class='page_container' data-page=178>

- T checks and corrects.

* Test for class 8C
I. Listening : (2p)

25.Nguyen Thu Huong
26.8 C

27.October 2nd, 1996

28.watching TV and studying
English

I. Reading : (3p)
25.A farmer lived a

comfortable life
26.No, he didn’t.

27.He discovered one/a gold
egg.

28.Because his wife wanted
more (gold eggs).

29.No, he couldn’t.
30.Yes, they were.

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes
in the test.

- Some Ss have mistakes in
dictation.

- Choose wrong answers.
- Ss write wrong answers.
- Ss use wrong structures.

2. She tries to fill one page a day.
3. She puts words in groups.

4. She writes regular verbs, irregular verbs and
positions on grammar pages.

5. Yes, they are.
IV/ Write

- We received my secondary semester report last
month.

- I got good grades for Geography, Math and
English.

- I need to improve History and Literature.
- We are going to Ha Long Bay next week.
III. Language focus3: (3p)

1- b 2- d 3- c 4- a 5- b

6- c 7- a 8- d 9- a 10- d

IV. Writing: (2p)

1. I’m (very) happy to tell you that I’m going to 
join the Y&Y Green Group.

2. The Green Group is having an environment 
week.

3. We are going to sweep the roads in our 
neighborhood.

4. We are going to plant trees and flowers in the 
school garden.

5. And we water them everyday, too.

6. We are planting young trees to sell to other 
schools.

7. We hope to give more green color to our school 
and earn some money for our school Y&Y.

8. Write to me soon and tell (me) all your news.
B/ Correcting Ss typical mistakes’

I/ Listening

II/ Choose the best options.
Ex:

5. C. badly () D. bad()
6. A. washing () D. to wash ()
III/ Reading

Ex:

5. Yes, they are. () Yes, she is. (x)
IV/ Write

Ex:

I need improve History and Literature.
to

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Do the test again after correction.

- Prepare Unit 7: Getting started + Listen and read

Read the lesson again and find new words with their meanings.

Week 14

Period 39 Teaching date: 08/12 /2009
unit 7: My neighborhood

</div>
(179)<div class='page_container' data-page=179>

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about Na’s new
neighbor.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, tape, 
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up

- T introduces the pictures and
requirements.

- Ss read the words and match.

- Ss work individual, and compare with a
partner.

- T calls on 2 Ss to write their answers on
the board.

- T asks other Ss to read their answers.
- T corrects.

II/ Listen and read

- T elicits some new words
example

here

(to) give some food and drink
explanation

delicious
Checking: What and Where

- T introduces the model sentences and
form of a new tense.

- Ss read and copy.

- sets the scene: Nam and Na are talking
to each other. Na is new to the
neighborhood and she wants to know
something about the neighborhood.
- T gives Ss two questions.

- Ss look at book and listen to tape two
times.

- Ask Ss to answer the questions
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks some pairs and corrects.
- Ss read the dialogue again and
complete the sentences.

- Ss work individually.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and correct.
III. Production

- gives instructions: make sentences
using the Present Perfect tense with
since/ for

- asks students to do the exercise
- asks students to call out the answers

I/ Getting started

Match the names with pictures.
a. grocery store

b. stadium
c. wet market
d. drugstore
e. hairdresser’s
f. swimming-pool
II/ Listen and read
* Vocabulary

neighborhood (n) : hµng xãm
close by (adv) : ë gÇn
serve (v) : phôc vô
pancake (n) : b¸nh bét m×
tasty (adj) : ngon

* Grammar

(1) We have been here since last week.
(2) Nam has lived here for ten years.
have/has + PII : Present Perfect tense
for : a period of time

since: a point of time

1. Comprehension questions
a/ How long has Nam lived in that
neighborhood?

b/ Where does Na want to go out?
Answer:

a. He has lived there for ten years.
b. She wants to go to a restaurant.

2. Practice the dialogue with a partner.
3. Complete the sentences

a. new
b. last week
c. tired
d. restaurant
e. Hue
f. pancake

* Word cue Drill: (poster)

6. The Robinsons/ live/ Ha Noi/
2001

</div>
(180)<div class='page_container' data-page=180>

- gives feedback and corrects 9. They/ be/ Hue/ 3 days

They / be/ Ho Chi Minh City/ yesterday
D/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Read the dialogue again.

- Do exercise 4 on page 45 in workbook.
Ex: a. I live in Tien Dong village.
- Prepare: Speak and Listen

Read and do the exercises before.

Week 14

Period 40 Teaching date: 10 /12 / 2009

unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 2: Speak + Listen
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know more about Na’s new neighbor.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, tape,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
* Anticipated problems: not enough time

C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up : Brainstorming

Group1 Group 2
post office

go to the movies

II/ New lesson

1. Presentation

- T presents some new words.
explanation
explanation

picture
example
translation

picture
example
translation
mime
explanation
Checking by what and where

- T sets the scene: Mrs. Kim wants to send a
parcel to Quy Nhon, so she has to go to the
post office.

I/ Speak

*Vocabulary

airmail (n) : th gửi bằng đờng hàng
không

surface mail (n) : th gửi bằng đờng bộ/
thuỷ , th thờng
weigh (v) : cân nặng

weight (n) : trọng lợng
charge (n) : giá cả, chi phí
parcel (n) : bu kiÖn

photo exhibition (n): triĨn l·m ¶nh

to take a photograph : chôp ảnh
performance=show (n):buổi trình chiếu

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

* Questions

a. Does Mrs. Kim send the parcel airmail or
surface mail? Why?

neighborhoo
d

</div>
(181)<div class='page_container' data-page=181>

- T gives some questions.
- Ss read the dialogue in pairs.
- One pair read it aloud.

- Ask Ss to answer the questions.
- T corrects.

2. Practice

- T explains the words and phrases in the
boxes.

- T guides Ss to make dialogues by using
mapped dialogue.

- T does model with a good student.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects.
Example exchange

S1: Can I help you?

S2: I want to send this letter to Kon Tum.
S1: Do you want to send it airmail or
surface mail?

S2: Surface mail, please. How much is it?
S1: I’ll weigh it. It’s 20 grams. That’s 800
dong.

S2: Here you are.
S1: Thank you.

S2: You are welcome.

3. Production

- Ask Ss to write one of four dialogues in
notebook.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- One student writes on the board.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Pre-listening

- T sets the scene: Na is new in the

neighborhood. She is talking to Nam about
what she’s going to do on the weekend.

- T introduces the requirement.

- Ss read the advertisements and phrases.
- Ss predict.

2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape and check their prediction.
- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-listening

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T checks and corrects

b. What’s the weight of the parcel?
c. How much does she pay?

Answer:

a. She sends the parcel surface mail because
it is much cheaper.

b. It’s five kilograms.
c. She pays 19,200 dong.
2. Make similar dialogue

Mapped dialogue

Clerk You

Can I help you? I want to send
this ….. to…..
Do you want to

send it …….
or ………..?

……mail, please.
How much ……?
I’ll weigh it.

It’s …. grams/
kilograms.
That’s … dong.

Here you are.
Thank you. Bye.

Bye.

3. Writing

II/ Listen

1. Fill the blanks in advertisement

a. Prediction
b. Listening

(2) Town Ground

(3) English Speaking Contest
(4) Culture House

2. Listen again and check for True, False 
or No Information.

a. T d. T b. F
e. T c. F f. N I

3. Retell the dialogue

Ex: Na is new in the neighborhood. She
doesn’t know what to do on the weekend

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 5 on page 46 in workbook.

Write verbs in past simple or present perfect tense.
Ex: a. started b. have known

Week 14

Period 41 Teaching date: 11/12/2009
unit 7: My neighborhood

</div>
(182)<div class='page_container' data-page=182>

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the passage about a
new shopping mall.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
* Anticipated problems: not enough time

C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up: Matching

A B

1. shop a. sự thay đổi
2. roof b. giá rẻ

3. customer c. thơng mại, buôn bán
4. owner d. hµng ho¸

5. change (n) e. cưa hµng
6. business f. khách hàng
7. goods g. mái nhà
8. cheap price h. ngêi chñ
9. discuss (v) i. th¶o luËn
Key: 1- e, 2- g, 3- f, 4- h, 5- a, 6- c, 7- d, 8- b, 9- i

II/ New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
explanation

translation
comfortable (adj)

translation
produce (v)

example
translation

situation
translation
- T sets the scene: In Nam’s

neighborhood there is a new shopping
mall.

- Ss read the statements and predict True
or False.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-reading

- Ss read the text and the advertisement
to check their prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to correct false sentences.

- Ask Ss to read the text again to find out
answers. Ss work in pairs. (5’)

- T checks: Lucky numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6
d LK a b LK c

* Vocabulary

mall (n) : khu thơng mại
convenient (adj) : thuận tiện
comfort (n) : sự thoải mái
notice (v) : lu ý, lu t©m
product (n) : s¶n phÈm
resident (n) : c d©n

selection (n) : sù chän lùa
discount (n) : sù gi¶m gi¸

air-conditioned (adj) : có điều hồ nhiệt
độ

1. True or False?
* Prediction

* Reading

a. F b. F c. F d. T e. T
* Correction

a. The mall is open daily.

b. There are 50 stores in the mall.

c. Some people are not pleased about the
new mall.

2. Answer

a. It is different from the present
shopping area. All the shops are under
one roof, so customers won’t notice the
weather.

b. There are 50 air-conditioned specialty
stores, 4 movie theaters, 10 restaurants
and a children play area.

c. They think the mall will take their
business.

</div>
(183)<div class='page_container' data-page=183>

3. Post-reading

- Ask Ss to discuss the market or a big
store in your neighborhood.

- Ss work in 4 groups.
- T checks and corrects.

3. Discussion
Example:

There are a lot of stores in my
neighborhood ….

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.
- Do exercise 3 on page 44, 45.

Complete the dialogues.
Example: in book

a. Nam: Where do you live? (Present Simple)

How long have you live there? (Present Perfect)
- Prepare: Write

Read the lesson before.

Week 14

Period 42 Teaching date: 14 /12 /2009
unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write a notice.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
* Anticipated problems: Some Ss use wrong structures.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up:

Correct exercise 3 on page 44, 45 in workbook.

- T calls on some pairs to read the completed dialogues aloud.
- Ask other Ss to correct.

b. do … have you had c. has he worked …. for

d. Do … do … e. Do you … How long have you
have you know him …For lived here … For

II/ New lesson
1. Pre-writing

- T sets the scene: The residents and
store owners on Tran Phu Street are
going to hold a meeting to discuss the

effects of the new mall.

- Ss read the notice and answer the
questions.

- T listens and corrects.
- T gives Ss some notes.
- Ss copy.

2. While-writing

- Ask Ss to read the paragraph and find:

1.Read the community notice 
*Comprehension questions
a. Who hold the meeting?
b. Why do they hold?

c. Where and when will they hold the
meeting? What time?

d. Who can people contact?
* Note: A notice

</div>
(184)<div class='page_container' data-page=184>

owner, reason, place, time, person to
contact.

- Ss write individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

3. Post-writing

- T introduces and gives some situations.
- Ss work in groups of 3 or 4.

- T checks and corrects.

The School English Speaking Club
Holding a speaking contest
to celebrate the teacher’s day

Date: November 15

Time: 7.30 pm to 10.00 pm
Place: Hall 204, Building G

Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of
class 8H at the above address for more
information.

3. Write one or two notices about your
class meeting or your Sports Club 
meeting.

Situation: Class meeting
- To discuss mini-project

- To hold a picture drawing contest

- To hold a singing contest

D/ Guiding – Homework
- Continue to write a notice.

- Do exercise 1 on page 44 in workbook.
Example:

Infinitive Past Participle
work worked
- Prepare: Language focus

Read and do the exercises before.

Week 15

Period 43 Teaching date: 17/12 /2009
unit 7: My neighborhood

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use Present Perfect tense and
make comparison by using adjectives: like, the same as, different from, …

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

</div>
(185)<div class='page_container' data-page=185>

* Anticipated problems: not enough time

C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up:

Pelmanism
Infinitive – Past Participle

be go eat attend see do write work collect

been gone eaten attended seen done written worked collected

II/ New lesson

- T introduces the exercise.

- Ss read each pair of verbs in warm up.
- T listens and corrects

- T introduces the exercise.

- Ss say the use of “for” and “since”.
- Ss complete and then compare with a
partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T sets the scene: Na is new in Nam’s
neighborhood. They are talking to each

other.

- What is the tense of the verbs?
- What is its form?

- T says requirement and example.
- Ss work individual, then compare with
a partner.

- T checks and corrects.

- T explains requirement.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- T shows the pictures and explains the
example.

- Ss look at the picture.

- Ss read the sentences and given words.
- Ss read and complete each sentences.
- T checks and corrects.

1. Match each verb with its participle
be – been, do - did

go – gone, write – written
eat – eaten, work - worked

live – lived, collect -

collected

attend – attended, see –seen
2. Complete the expressions
for five minutes

since January
since 1990

since the summer
for three hours
for ten weeks
since Friday
for 20 years.

3. Complete the sentences.
* Model sentences

Na: How long have you lived here?
Nam: I have lived here for ten years.
* Present Perfect tense

- Form: have/ has + PII

- Use: to talk about what started in the
past and continued up to the present.
b. have not (haven’t ) eaten

c. haven’t seen
d. have attended
e. has worked
f. has collected

4. Complete the conversation.
(1) have been (5) want
(2) hope (6) looks

(3) have … lived (7) Have … been
(4) Is (8) have seen
5. Complete the sentences

Example:

a. The magazine is not as/so large as the
newspaper.

b. Lipton tea is different from Dilmah
tea.

c. different from / not as cheap as
d. the same as

</div>
(186)<div class='page_container' data-page=186>

- Ss say the structures.
- Ss copy in notebook.

g. as long as

h. not as modern as

i. not as cheap as
* Form:

+ (not) as … as: (kh«ng) b»ng
+ different from: kh¸c

+ the same as : gièng
D/ Guiding – Homework

- Do the exercises again.

- Prepare Unit 8: Getting started + Listen and read.

Read the lesson before; find new words with their meanings.
Week 15

Period 44 Teaching date: 18/12 /2009
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to talk about the city life and the
country life.

B/ Teaching aids: textbook, cassette player, picture
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
C/ Procedures

I/Warm up

- T asks:

+ Where do you live?

+ Have you ever been to city?

+ Are there many differences between
them?

T: Now make a list of the differences
between the countryside and the city
- Ss work in pairs, Ss can use given
words in book.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the lesson: Today you are
going to listen and read about the
differences between the city and the
countryside

II/ Listen and read

- T hangs the picture on the board and
introduces the dialogue between Hoa
and Na.

- T gives 2 questions.

- Ss look at book, listen to tape and

answer the questions.

- T listens and corrects.
- T elicits some new words.

situation
translation

example
(to) be able to use
Check: What and Where

- T introduces model sentences.
- What do they mean?

- What is tense of the verbs?

I/ Getting started

The differences between the country and
the city.

City
noisy,pollution
noisy, tall
buildings, kinds
of goods,

entertainments,
traffic jam …

Countryside
quiet,fresh air
beautiful views,
fresh air,

friendly, fresh
foods ….

II/ Listen and read

* Comprehension questions
- Where does Hoa prefer to live?
- What about Na?

* Vocabulary

peaceful (adj) : bình yên

permanently (adv) : mãi mãi, vĩnh viễn
facility (n) : cở sở vật chất, phơng tiện
accessible (adj) : có thể đợc sử dụng
* Model sentences:

- Things are changing in the countryside.
- Many remote areas are getting

</div>
(187)<div class='page_container' data-page=187>

- When is the present progressive tense
also used?

- Ss look at book and read the dialogue
in pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T asks some pairs to read the dialogue
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the questions.
- T explains difficult questions if
necessary.

- Ss ask and answer the questions in
pairs.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to work in groups of 3,4 to say
about advantages of country life.

- T collects and writes on the board.

Present Progressive is also used to
express the change.

1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.

2. Answer the questions

a. Na has been to the countryside.
b. She was there for the weekend/ for
one day.

c. The countryside is peaceful and quiet
and nothing to do.

3. Discussion

Say advantages of life in the countryside.

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise 2 on page 49 in workbook.

Complete the sentences with the given verbs in the present progressive.
Ex: a. is leaving

- Prepare part: Speak + Listen

Read the lesson before and find new words with their meanings.

Week 16 Teaching date: 22/12/2009
Period 45

unit 8: Country life and city life
Lesson 2: Speak + Listen

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to practice speaking about the
changes of a place and complete the dialogue by listening.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, cassette player, picture
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

* Anticipated problems: it’s difficult for Ss to express their ideas.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Lucky numbers
Exercise 2 on page 49

</div>
(188)<div class='page_container' data-page=188>

1d, 2lk, 3f, 4b, 5e, 6lk, 7c, 8lk
* Key:

b. are studying e. is flying
c. is moving f. am seeing

d. am fishing

II/ New lesson
1. Presentation

- T hangs the pictures and introduces
example in book.

+ What does it mean?

+ What tense of the verb is?
+ What is it used to express?
2. Practice

- T says the requirement.
- Ss read the given words.

- Ss find pairs of noun and adjectives.
- T writes on the board.

- T asks one S to make an example.
- Ss work in pairs. Each student makes a
sentence.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- Ask Ss to say their sentences.
- T listens and corrects.

3. Production

- T introduces the exercise and does
example.

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.
- T asks to say their ideas.
- T checks and corrects.
II/ Listen

1. Pre-listening

- T sets the scene: Aunt Hang is talking
to Lan on the phone. She is coming to
visit Lan in Hanoi.

- Ss read the dialogue and guess missing
words.

- T checks 2 Ss.
2. While-listening

- Ss listen to tape and check their
prediction.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-listening

- Ask Ss to make similar dialogues.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

I/ Speak

* Model sentences

- The town is becoming busier.
is getting

* Form:

be + getting / becoming + adj
* Use:

It is used to describe changes with “get”
and “become”.

1. Talk about the changes of the town.
Ex:

- traffic busy
sky cloudy
houses tall
city beautiful
tress green trees
streets noisy, busy and
beautiful

goods expensive
air, water dirty

means of transport modern
clothes beautiful
- The traffic is getting busier.

- There are more tall buildings and
houses.

- There are more green trees.

………

2. Talk about the changes in your 
hometown.

Ex:

The roads are becoming larger/ more
beautiful.

II/ Listen

Fill in the missing words.
* Prediction

* Listening

(1) that (8) arriving
(2) this ( 9) Thursday
(3) It’s (10) late

</div>
(189)<div class='page_container' data-page=189>

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Do exercise 5 on page 51 in workbook.

Ex: a. are getting/ becoming more important.
- Write 5 sentences about the changes in our school.
- Prepare part: Read

Read the lesson and find new words their meanings.

Week 16 Teaching date: 24/12 /2009
Period 46

unit 8: Country life and city life
Lesson 3: Read

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand the text about one of
the social problems.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
* Anticipated problems: many difficult words.

C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Matching

1. plentiful a. ph¸ hủ
2. nature b. kÕt qu¶
3. flood c. nhiÒu
4. destroy d. d©n sè
5. population e. tự nhiên
6. provide f. cơ së vËt chÊt
7. result g. lị lơt

8. facilities h. cung cÊp
* Key:

1 – c, 2 – e, 3 – g, 4 – a, 5 – d, 6 – h, 7 – b, 8 – f.
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-reading

- T elicits some new words.
translation

big storm
>< flood
translation
explanation

situation
>< increase

= chance

Checking: What and Where

- T asks Ss to think of the difficulties of
farmers’ life.

- Ss say and T writes on the board.
- T introduces the text and asks Ss to
guess the answer to the question.
2. While-reading

- Ss read the text individual to answer
the question.

- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement and
guides Ss to do. T does model part 1.
- Ss read the text again and find suitable
words to complete.

* Vocabulary

* Difficulties of farmer s life’

droughts, bad weather, hard work, flood,
lack of clean water/ electricity ….

- What do many farmers do to solve their
problems?

1. Complete the summary
Example: (1) leaving

Key:

</div>
(190)<div class='page_container' data-page=190>

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
Noughts and Crosses

2 3 4

5 6 7

8 9 10

- T introduces, guides and does model
part a.

- Ss read the text again and find suitable
words.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T checks and corrects.
3. Post-reading

- Ss work in groups of 3,4.

- T calls groups to say their ideas.
- T collects and writes on the board.

(4) rural (9) problem
(5) city (10) world
(6) problems

2. Find the words in the passage that 
means:

a. rural d. strain
b. plentiful e. tragedy
c. increase f. urban
3. Discussion

If you were a Minister, what would you
do for farmers?

Ex:

- build schools, hospitals, …
- provide clean water

- ………

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Learn by heart all new words.

- Do exercise 4 on page 51 in workbook.
Ex: a. visits …….. once a year.

- Prepare Part: Write

Revise the form of a letter.

Week 17

Period 47 Teaching date: 25/12 /2009
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 4: Write
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to write letters to their friends about
their neighborhood.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
* Anticipated problems:

C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Chatting
- Do you often write letters?

- How often do you write?
- Who do you write to?

- What do you often write about?
II/ New lesson

1. Pre-writing

</div>
(191)<div class='page_container' data-page=191>

and reorder.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ask Ss to read the questions and
answer them.

- Ss work individual.

- T asks some Ss to answer.

- Ask Ss can give some ideas, not real in
their village.

2. While-writing

- Ask Ss to write individual.
- T goes around and helps Ss.

- T writes down Ss’ typical mistakes.

3. Post-writing

- T corrects Ss’ typical mistakes on the
board.

- Ss compare with a partner.

- T asks some Ss to read their writings
aloud.

- T listens and corrects.

- writer’s address
- date

B. Opening

C. Body of the letter
D. Closing

2. Answer the questions
Example:

1. I live in a small village/ …

2. My house is very nice/ beautiful/ …
3. From my bedroom window, I can see

a large paddy field/ ….

4. It’s very far from/ near / next to/… my
house.

5. I get to school by bike/ …

6. There are some stores, food stalls, a
stadium, a small market, ….

7. I like the stadium best.

8. Because I often play soccer with my
friends there.

3. Write a letter.
Ex:

Tien Dong village
December 8th , 2008 
Dear Phuong,

Thank you for your letter. I am telling
you about the place where I live. I live in

My family has a small/ large house

…

with … bedrooms …and a garden. I and

my sister have a bedroom. From the
bedroom window, I can see a green
paddy field with cows and buffaloes
grazing there. I live don’t near my
school so I go to school by bike. In my
neighborhood there are some stores, a
small market, a stadium. I like the

stadium best because I often play soccer
with my friends in the afternoon. Do you
have a stadium like that in your

neighborhood? Is there any interesting in
the place where you live? Write to me.
I’d like to say goodbye now. I’m
looking forwards to hearing from you
soon.

Love,
Hoa

4. Correction

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Ask Ss to write the letter again after correction.
- Do exercises of Language focus before.

</div>
(192)<div class='page_container' data-page=192>

Week 17

Period 48 Teaching date: 29/12 /2009
unit 8: Country life and city life

Lesson 5: Language focus
A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to use present progressive to show
changes with “get” and “become” to talk about the future and comparative and

superlative adjectives.
B/ Teaching aids:

textbook,

* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC
* Anticipated problems: not enough time

C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming
Group 1 Group 2

II/ New lesson

- T introduces the dialogues.
- Ss read in pairs.

- Two pairs read them aloud.

- T guides Ss to use the information in

the table to replace to make similar
dialogues.

- T does model with a good Ss.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T checks and corrects.

- T shows requirement and example.
- One pair read the example.

- Ss work in pairs to complete other
dialogues.

- T goes around and helps Ss.
- T checks and corrects.

- T introduces the requirement and
example.

- Ss read the adjectives and complete the
sentences individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- Ss say form and use of get and become.

1. Make similar dialogues
* Note:

- Form: am/ is/are + V-ing

- The present perfect tense is also used to
express the plans in the future.

2. Complete the dialogues. Use the 
verbs in the present progressive tense.
Example:

a. S1: What are you doing tonight?
S2: I’m playing table tennis.
(1) are doing

(2) am watching
(3) am going
(4) am cleaning
(5) am having

3. Complete the sentences
Example:

a. The boys are getting taller.
b. are getting/ becoming weaker
c. is getting dark

d. is becoming cold
e. are getting better
f. is becoming cleaner

* To express changes, we can use:
am/ is/ are + getting/ becoming + adj
4. Make comparisons between the city

</div>
(193)<div class='page_container' data-page=193>

- T asks Ss to retell the form and use of
comparative.

- T introduces requirement.

- Ss read the adjectives and given words
and say their meanings.

- Ss make sentences in pairs.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks Ss to say again the uses and
forms of the superlative.

- Ss read the advertisement and example.
- Ss make sentences with adjectives.
- T checks and corrects.

and country.
* Comparative

- Form: short adj _er + than
more + long adj + than
*Key:

- The food in the city is more expensive

than in the country.

- The schools in the country are smaller
than in the city.

……

5. Compare the house, the villa and the 
apartment.

* Superlative

- Form: the short adj-est
the most + long adj
- Example:

1. The house is more expensive then the
apartment.

2. The apartment is smaller than the
villa.

3. The villa is the oldest home.
.

………

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.

- Do exercise 3 on page 50 in workbook.
Ex: On Monday evening I am going to ….
- Revise Unit 1 and Unit 2.

Week 18

Period 49 Teaching date: 02 /01/2010
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge
in Unit 1 and Unit 2.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

* Anticipated problems: some Ss don’t remember knowledge.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Guessing Game
- T asks one S to describe one of student in class.

Ex: He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. He is wearing …..

- Others guess. Who guesses correctly goes to the board and describes another.
II/ New lesson

- T guides.

- Ss say the main knowledge of the unit
1.

A. Grammar
I. Unit 1

1. Present Simple tense to talk about
general truths.

Form: (+) S + V/V-s/es + …

(-) S + don’t + infinitive ….
(?) Does/ Do + S + infinitive …?
Ex: The sun rises in the East.

</div>
(194)<div class='page_container' data-page=194>

- T listens, corrects and writes on the
board.

- Ss make examples.

- T asks Ss to retell the knowledge of the
unit 2.

- T listens, corrects and writes on the
board.

- T hangs extra-board.
- Ss read the exercise.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.

- T asks Ss to read the words in chorus.

- T guides.

- Ask Ss to read the sentences.
- Ss work individual.

- Ss compare with a partner.
- T checks and corrects.
* Answer:

1. will visit …… to meet
2. goes …… moves
3. are going to

- T introduces and guides.
- Ss work in pairs.

- Ss go to the board and write each
sentence.

- T corrects.

*Answer:

1. This shirt is not big enough for her
son to wear.

2. Hung is generous and outgoing but

đủ (khơng đủ ….. để làm gì

Ex: He is not old enough to go to school.
II. Unit 2

1. “be going to” to talk about intention
Form : be going to + infinitive

Ex: I am going to go fishing with my
friends this afternoon.

2. Adverbs of place

outside, inside, there, here, upstairs,
downstairs.

Ex: Some students are outside.
We are upstairs.

I. Unit 3

1. Reflexive pronouns

myself, yourself, yourselves, ourselves,
themselves, herself, himself

Use: to emphasize subject or object
It can be object in the sentence.
Form: S+ V + (O) + reflexive pronoun
Position: It stands at the end of the
sentence or after S or O.

2. Modals

- must/ have to + infinitive : to express
obligation

- ought to + infinitive: to express advice
3. Why…? Because….

to ask answer about reason
Ex: Why are you late?

Because my bike broke down.
B. Exercises

Exercise 1:

Choose the words which the underlined
part is different form the others.

1.A. children B. chicken
C. chair D. character

2.A. curly B. shy

C. fly D. sky
3. A. joke B. local
C. blond D. sociable
Exercise 2: Write correct form of verbs
1. My grandparents (visit) ……….. us
next Sunday. Would you like (meet)
them?

2. The Moon (go) ….. around the Earth,
and the Earth (move) around the Sun.
3. We are learning to fly. We (be) going
to be a pilot.

Exercise 3: Write sentences, using given
words.

</div>
(195)<div class='page_container' data-page=195>

thing I like most is his sense of humor.
3. We are going to a pop concert at the
City Concert tonight.

D. Guiding – Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Make sentences using the structures.
- Revise Unit 3 and Unit 4.

Week 18

Period 50 Teaching date: 05/ 01/ 2010
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge
in Unit 3 and Unit 4.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

* Anticipated problems: some Ss don’t remember knowledge.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming

Group 1 Group 2
cooking meals

II. New lesson

- Ask Ss to say the main knowledge of
unit 3.

- Ss say reflexive pronouns and their use.
- Ss give example.

- Ss say form and use of modal verbs.

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss say the use of why question.
- Ss make example.

- Ss say main knowledge of unit 4.
- Ss say form and use of “used to”.

- Ss say prepositions of time and uses.
- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss makes example.

A. Main knowledge
II. Unit 4

1. used to + infinitive

to express an action which usually
happed in the past but now it stops.
Ex: I used to get up late when I was very
little.

2. Prepositions of time
in: month, year, season
on: date, day of week
at: o’clock

between … and …
after , before : time

Ex: I often get up at six o’clock.

3. Past Simple tense

- Form: ( +) S + V-ed/ V(past)

- Use: express an action which happened
and finished at definite time in the past.
- Adverbs: yesterday, ago, last …

B. Exercises

Exercise 1: Write past form of each verb
go, appear, sit, have, do, come

</div>
(196)<div class='page_container' data-page=196>

- Ss say form, use of past simple tense.
- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy.

- T hangs the extra-board on the board.
- Ss read the exercise and write past
form of the verbs.

Key: went, appeared, sat, had, did, came
- Ss read the verbs and their past form in
chorus.

- Ss read the exercise and complete the
sentences.

- T checks and corrects.

Key: 1. at…at 2. on 3. between
4. to…on

-T introduces.
- Ss work in pairs.

- T asks Ss to write on the board.
Key:1. This is Hoa’s living room.

2. There is a rug in front of the fireplace.
3. A dog is lying on the rug.

4. There are some pictures on the wall.
5. The telephone is near the lamp.

preposition.

1. I’ll see you … 9.00 … the morning.
2. Mary was born … December 25th.
3. Lan is sitting … Nga and Hoan.
4. I listen … music … the radio.
Exercise 3: Write a description of
Mary’s living room.

1. This/ Hoa’s living room.

2. There/ a rug/ in front of/ the fireplace.
3. A dog/ lying / rug.

4. There/ some pictures/ wall.

5. The telephone/ near/ lamp.

D/ Guiding – Homework

- Write the exercises in notebook.
- Do exercises in workbook again.
- Revise knowledge of unit 5 and unit 6.

Week 18

Period 51 Teaching date: 07/01/ 2010
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge
in Unit 5 and Unit 6.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

* Anticipated problems: some Ss don’t remember knowledge.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Chatting
- T asks one student: How often do you have English?
- S answers: I have English three times a week.
- Ask Ss to work in pairs.

- T checks some pairs and corrects.
II/ New lesson

- Ss say the main knowledge of unit 5.

</div>
(197)<div class='page_container' data-page=197>

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy and give example.

- Ss say form and use of adverbs of
manner.

- Ss make examples.

- Ss say main knowledge of unit 6.
- Ss say form and use of gerunds.
- Ss make examples.

- Ss open the book and read the
structures.

- T makes an example dialogue with a
good student.

- Ss make other dialogues.

- T introduces exercise.

- Ss work in pairs to make reported
sentences.

- Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects.

- T guides.

- Ss read the words and choose.

- T checks and corrects and asks Ss to
read the words in chorus.

- Ss read the exercise.

- Ss write correct form of the verbs on
the board.

- T checks and corrects.

- Ss read the table on page 55 again to
make dialogues.

- Ss work in pairs.

- Ask some pairs to say aloud.
- T corrects.

1. Reported speech
a. request, command

S + asked/ told + O + to infinitive + …

Ex: She asked me to sit down.

b. advice

S1+ said + S2 + should + infinitive + …
Ex: He said I should get up early.

2. Adverbs of manner.
Form: adj + ly = adv

Use: bổ nghĩa cho động từ thờng.
S + V + (O) + adv +…
Ex: She runs quickly.

II. Unit 6
1. Gerunds
Form:

like/love/hate/dislike/hate/ enjoy +V-ing
Use: to express hobbies.

Ex: I like swimming.

2. Ask for favor and offer assistance
( on page 55)

Ex:

T: Could you help me, please?

S: Of course. What can I do for you?
T: Can you open the windows, please?
S: Yes. I’ll help you.

T: Thank you.
B. Exercise

Exercise 1: Report these sentences.
1. “ Please stop making noise,” said Mrs.
Lan

2. “You should spend more time doing
your homework, Tam,” said Mr. Nam.
3. “Could you take these pictures to my
room, Tan?” asked Nga.

4. “You should concentrate on your
study at school.” said the teacher.
Exercise 2: Choose the word that has 
different pronunciation.

1. A. recycle B. sky
C. why D. century
2. A. meal B. ahead
C. reading D. please
3. A. youth B. thank
C. thirsty D. there

Exercise 3: Write correct forms of verbs.
1. My sister loves (cook), but she doesn’t

like (wash) the dishes.

2. Nam (not, want) (go) to the Water
Park because he (visit) it yesterday.
3. You (enjoy) (watch) the movie on TV
last night?

4. We (collect) garbage in Lenin park
next Sunday.

Exercise 4: Make conversations, using 
structures of asking for favor and
offering assistance.

</div>
(198)<div class='page_container' data-page=198>

- Write their conversations in notebook.
- Make 5 sentences, using the structures.
- Revise unit 7 and unit 8.

Week 19

Period 52 Teaching date: / / 2009
revision

A/ Objectives

By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to conclude and revise knowledge
in Unit 7 and Unit 8.

B/ Teaching aids:

textbook, extra-board
* Work arrangements: individual, pairs, groups, T - WC

* Anticipated problems: some Ss don’t remember knowledge.
C/ Procedures:

I/ Warm up Brainstorming
Ask Ss to write nouns and adjectives about city and country.
Group 1 Group 2

II. New lesson

- Ask Ss to say the main knowledge of
unit 7.

- Ss say form and use of present perfect
tense.

- Ss say use of “for” and “since”.

- Ss make examples.

- Ss say form and give example.
- T corrects.

- Ss say the main knowledge of unit 8.
- Ss say form and use of Present Perfect
tense.

- T corrects and writes on the board.

- T says form and use of comparative
and superlative.

- T corrects and writes on the board.
- Ss copy and give examples.

A. Main knowledge
I. Unit 7

1. Present perfect
- Form: have/ has + PII

- Use: to express an action which began
in the past and continues to the present.
Adverb: for, since

Example:

(1) I have learned English for two years.
(2) She has lived here since 2000.

2. Comparison with:

as … as; the same as; different from.
Ex: This book is different from that one.
II. Unit 8

1. Present Progressive
Form:

am/ is/ are + getting/ becoming + adj
Use: to express changes

Ex: You are getting taller.
2. Comparative and superlative
a. Comparative

… short adj –er + than + …

… more + long adj + than + …
Ex: I am taller than you.

She is more beautiful than her sister.
b. Superlative

… the + short adj – est

… the most + long adj + …
Ex: He is shortest in my class.

This shirt is the most expensive one
of all.

B. Exercise

</div>
(199)<div class='page_container' data-page=199>

- T introduces the exercise.
- Ss read and do individual.
- T checks and corrects.
- Key:

1. for 2. from
3. same 4. as
5. since

- T introduces.
- Ss work in pairs.

- Ask Ss to write on the board.
- T corrects and gives marks.
- Key: 1. is getting
2. hasn’t visited .... went
3. Have you been… spent
4. does ………. am doing

- T guides. – Ss work individual.
- T checks and corrects.

- Key:

1. I haven’t seen Minh for six months.
2. Tom hasn’t visited his uncle for two
years.

3. The last time Hoa wrote to her parents
was three months.

Exercise 1: Complete the sentences with
one word.

1. We have been to Hoi An … five days.

2. My sister’s taste is different …. mine.
3. Mr. Long is the …. ..age as my father.
4. Mai’s house is as big ……..ours.
5. It has rained ….. 2 o’clock.

Exercise 2: Write correct form of verbs.
1. Your son (get) taller, Mrs Mai.

2. Hung (not, visit) his grandparents
since he (go) to university.

3. You (be) to Nha Trang before?
Yes. I (spend) my holiday there last
summer.

4. My sister always (do) the washing up,
but I (do) it tonight because she is sick.
Exercise 3: Rewrite the sentences
1. I last saw Minh six months ago.
2. The last time Tom visited his uncle
was two years ago.

3. Hoa hasn’t written to her parents for
three months.

D. Guiding – Homework

</div>
(200)<div class='page_container' data-page=200></div>